Cast-in-Place Concrete Specification

SECTION 03 3000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concrete formwork.
B.
Concrete reinforcement.
C.
Joint devices associated with concrete work.
D.
Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads.
E.
Concrete curing.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A.
ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials;
American Concrete Institute International; 2006.
B.
ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2009).
C.
ACI 212.3R - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2004.
D.
ACI 229R - Controlled Low-Strength Materials (CLSM); 1999 (Reapproved 2005).
E.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2005.
F.
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999.
G.
ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988
(Reapproved 2002).
H.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2008.
I.
ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2004.
J.
ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; 2004.
K.
ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete; 2007.
L.
ASTM A 884/A 884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement; 2006.
M. ASTM A 996/A 996M - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b.
N.
ASTM C 31/C 31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field; 2009.
O.
ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2009a.
P.
ASTM C 78/C78M - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple
Beam with Third-Point Loading); 2010.
Q.
ASTM C 88 - Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate; 2005.
R.
ASTM C 131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine; 2006.
S.
ASTM C 289 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates
(Chemical Method); 2007.
T.
ASTM C 359 - Standard Test Method for Early Stiffening of Hydraulic Cement (Mortar Method);
2008.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 3000 - 1
Controlled document is electronic file on Kahn server. Verify latest version. (c)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
For Review.
1. Shop drawings.
a. Steel reinforcement.
2. Design data.
a. Concrete mixture design.
b. Procedure for control of placing temperature.
C.
For Information.
1. Product data.
a. Cement.
b. Admixtures.
c. Chairs and other reinforcement supports.
d. Epoxy anchors.
e. Epoxy bonding agent.
2. Design/performance data.
a. Materials used in concrete.
3. Test Reports.
a. Materials used in concrete.
b. Strength test.
c. Laboratory reports.
d. Mortar content - percentage of concrete mix.
4. Certificates.
a. Aggregates.
b. Fly ash.
c. Ground granulated blast furnace slag.
d. Cement.
e. Admixtures.
5. Manufacturers Instructions.
a. Admixtures.
b. Fibers.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.
Qualifications.
1. Design Professional (Specialty Engineer).
a. Accepts responsibility for design of formwork and shoring in accordance with
Contract Documents.
b. Experienced in providing design services of kind indicated.
c. Legally qualified (licensed) to practice structural engineering in Alabama.
B.
Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK
A.
Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347R and requirements of
Occupational Health and Safety Act to provide formwork that will produce concrete complying
with tolerances of ACI 117.
B.
Form Materials: CONTRACTOR's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to

withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.
1. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with
application of coatings.
2. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete
surface.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 3000 - 2
3.
Shoring and formwork shall remain in place for minimum of 7 days after placement of
concrete unless otherwise accepted by DESIGN PROFESSIONAL, and shall have
achieved compressive strength of at least 85 percent of minimum allowable design
compressive strength.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A.
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type.

1. Form: Coiled Rolls.
2. Mesh Size: 6 x 6.
3. Wire Gage: W 4 x W 4. W2.9 x W2.9
B.
Reinforcement Accessories.
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage.
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Cement.
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.
2. Submit name of manufacturer and brand proposed for use and obtain acceptance of
DESIGN PROFESSIONAL.
3. In exposed concrete, use only one brand of cement so color of cast-in-place concrete is
uniform.
4. Sample and test before using.
5. Report cement with characteristics or ingredients conducive to rapid set or excessive
shrinkage, or which may produce unsatisfactory concrete and not used without written
acceptance of DESIGN PROFESSIONAL, even though it meets specification and testing
requirements.
B.
Water.
1. Conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1602.
C.
Aggregate, Fine and Coarse.

1. General requirements.
a. ASTM C 33, except as modified by supplemental requirements contained in these
Specifications.
b. Free of substances deleterious to concrete or reinforcement.
c. Refer to architectural concrete work for provisions governing certain elements of the
building.
2. Fine aggregate.
a. Natural sand.
b. Maximum limits for deleterious substances, weight percent of total sample.
1) Clay lumps and friable particles: 3 percent.
2) Coal and lignite: 0.5 percent.
3) Material finer than No. 200 sieve: 3 percent.
c. ASTM C 33, Article 7, Deleterious Substances, Paragraph 7.3 is not applicable.
d. Not contain materials deleteriously reactive with cement alkalis.
e. Grading.
1) Well graded in accordance with ASTM C 33, except as modified by this
Specification.
2) Optional grading in ASTM C33, Article 6, Grading, Paragraph 6.2, is
unacceptable.
3. Coarse aggregate.
a. Well graded, meeting the following requirements.
1) ASTM C 33, Size 57, except as modified by this Specification.
(a) Not more than 90 percent passing 3/4 inch mesh sieve.
b. Acceptable materials: Crushed stone or Gravel.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 3000 - 3
1)
Crushed stone or Gravel.

(a) Deleterious material in crushed stone or gravel: Not more than total of 4
percent by weight.
(b) ASTM C 33, Class Designation 5S.
(c) ASTM C 33, Article 11, Deleterious Substances, Paragraph 11.3, is not
applicable.
(d) Wear in accordance with ASTM C 131, Los Angeles Abrasion Test: Not
more than 35 percent by weight.
D.
Admixtures.
1. General.
a. Not contain more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.
b. Submit certification of chloride ion content by manufacturer to DESIGN
PROFESSIONAL upon request.
c. Do not use calcium chloride and thiocyanates.
d. From a single source and compatible with each other.
e. Do not premix admixtures.
f.
Add each to concrete batch separately and to each batch in same mixing sequence.
g. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
h. Submit certifications of compliance.
i.
Refer to Architectural Concrete Work for provisions governing certain elements of the
building.
2. Air-entraining.
a. In accordance with ASTM C 260.
b. Use to entrain specified quantity of air in air-entrained concrete.
c. Do not use without written acceptance of DESIGN PROFESSIONAL.
d. Compatible with other admixtures.
e. Use vinsol resin type when using high range water reducer.
f.
Omit in concrete walls where indicated on drawings.
3. Water reducing admixtures.
a. Low-range water reducing admixture (LRWR).
1) In accordance with ASTM C 494, Type A.
b. Mid-range water reducing admixture (MRWR).
1) In accordance with ASTM C 494, Type A and Type F.
2) Acceptable products.
(a) Construction Products Division of W.R. Grace and Co; MIRA 70:
www.na.graceconstruction.com.
(b) The Euclid Chemical Company; Eucon MR: www.euclidchemical.com.
(c) Master Builders, BASF Admixtures, Inc.; PolyHeed 997:
www.basf-admixtures.com.
(d) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
c. High-range water reducing (superplasticizer) admixtures (HRWR).
1) In accordance with ASTM C 494, Type F.
2) Acceptable products.
(a) Construction Products Division of W.R. Grace and Co.; Daracem-100:
www.na.graceconstruction.com.
(b) The Euclid Chemical Company; Eucon-37: www.euclidchemical.com.
(c) Master Builders, BASF Admixtures, Inc.; Rheobuild 1000:
www.basf-admixtures.com.
(d) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
E.
Welded Wire Reinforcement.

1. In accordance with ASTM A 185, minimum yield strength of 65 ksi.
2. Flat sheets; rolled fabric not acceptable.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 3000 - 4
F.
Chairs, Bar Supports, or Other Devices Holding Reinforcing Bars in Place.

1. Capable of accurately positioning and spacing reinforcement, both horizontally and
vertically.
2. Sufficiently rigid to avoid displacement of bars in placing and vibrating concrete.
3. Material: Metal, plastic, or impervious material accepted by DESIGN PROFESSIONAL.
4. At exposed horizontal and sloped concrete surfaces.
a. Protect with baked-on vinyl plastic coating.
b. Average thickness of plastic at points of contact with form: 1/8 inch with individual
piece not less than 3/32 inch.
c. Height of plastic protection on wire above form: Not be less than 1/2 inch.
d. Plastic shall not chip, peel, crack, or deform under job conditions.
e. Acceptable products.
1) Dayton/Richmond Concrete Accessories, Inc.: www.daytonconcreteacc.com.
2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
G.
Epoxy Anchors.
1. Characteristics.
a. Two-part epoxy system consisting of base resin, hardener, and aggregate.
2. Acceptable products.
a. Anchor-It Fastening Systems by U.S. Anchor Corp., Pompano Beach, Florida 33064
www.usanchor.com.
b. Epcon System by ITW Ramset/Red Head, Wood Dale, Illinois 60191
www.ramset-redhead.com.
c. HIT RE 500 System by Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma 74146 www.hilti.com.
d. Power-Fast Epoxy Injection Gel System by Powers Fasteners, Inc., New Rochelle,
New York 10801 www.powers.com.
e. SET High Strength Epoxy by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Columbus, Ohio 43228
www.simpsonanchors.com.
f.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
H.
Epoxy Bonding Agent.

a. Duralprep AC by The Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, Ohio 44110:
www.euclidchemical.com.
b. Sika Armatec 110 Epocem by Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey 07071:
www.sikausa.com.
c. STO Bonding and Anti-Corrosion Agent CR246 by STO Corporation, Atlanta, Georgia
30336: www.stocorp.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.04 MIXES
A.
Design concrete mixes for types of concrete specified.
B.
In accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318, except as modified by these Specifications.
C.
Concrete Requirements.
1. Ultimate Compressive Strength.
a. Proportioning for mix design: In accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.3.
b. Average required strength for mix design: In accordance with ACI 301, Section
4.2.3.4.
2. Slumps specified are maximum unless concrete water reducing admixtures are employed
to increase workability.
3. If water reducing admixture is employed.
a. Consider quantity of water reducing admixture added to concrete as part of total
quantity of water.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 3000 - 5
b.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To determine quantity to be added, CONTRACTOR's laboratory shall prepare trial

batches to obtain desired slump and submit results to DESIGN PROFESSIONAL for
review.
Cement factor.
a. Proven by absolute volume method.
b. Total of components plus entrained air: Not more than 27 cubic feet per yard.
Entrained Air for Surfaces Exposed to Weather: 6 percent, plus or minus 1-1/2 percent.
For Types FS, design mix to obtain minimum modulus of rupture specified.
a. Mix design submitted for DESIGN PROFESSIONAL review shall contain results of
beam (flexural) and compressive strength tests.
Field control of slabs on ground concrete shall be by compressive strength.
D.
Types of Concrete.
1. Type B.
a. Ultimate Compressive Strength fc at 28 days: Not less than 3000 psi.
b. Cementitious Content: Not less than 520 pounds per cubic yard.
c. Water/Cementitious Ratio: Not more than 0.51.
d. Slump: Not more than 4 inches.
e. Modulus of Rupture at 28 days: Not less than 500 psi.
E.
Application.
1. Unless otherwise indicated on Contract drawings, use type of concrete as follows.
a. For concrete not otherwise indicated on Contract Documents: Type B.
F.
Water.
1. Maximum Quantity of Water: In accordance with water/cement ratio for each type of
concrete specified, includes free water contained in aggregate.
2. Quantity of Water to be Added to Combined Cement and Aggregates: Determined by
accepted mix design, varied to compensate for variation in free water content of
aggregates.
G.
Water Reducing Admixtures.

1. Low-range water reducing admixtures (LRWR).
a. Use to increase workability (slump) where required for concrete placement.
b. Slump of concrete: Not more than specified under heading, Types of Concrete, prior
to addition of admixture, or 6 inches following addition of admixture.
H.
Specified requirements for materials, procedures, and strengths set forth are maximum or
minimum, as case may be, and CONTRACTOR shall recognize that quality concrete is
dependent upon proper selection and proportioning of materials, characteristics which vary with
manufacturer or source, and that certain characteristics of materials are conducive to excessive
shrinkage and other defects in concrete work.
I.
When, in opinion of DESIGN PROFESSIONAL, variations from compressive strengths and

other characteristics determined from accepted mix designs are excessive (indicating lack of
control or changes in materials or quantities from those accepted), CONTRACTOR shall, at
own expense, make corrections necessary, including changes in materials and source of
supply, and arrange for required laboratory tests to maintain characteristics of accepted mix
designs.
J.
Prepare Report for Each Concrete Mix.

1. Report the following.
a. Aggregates, coarse and fine.
1) Specific gravity.
2) Weight per cubic foot (dry rodded).
3) Sieve analysis.
4) Fineness modulus.
5) Absorption.
6) Moisture content.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 3000 - 6
b.
c.
d.
e.
7) Percentage of deleterious materials.

Cement.
1) Tests specified.
2) Brand.
Test results for cylinder and beam specimens.
Quantities in pounds of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and water
required to yield 1 cubic yard of concrete.
Admixtures, if used: Brand, quantity and other pertinent information.
K.
Trial Batches of Concrete.

1. Make trial batches of concrete, using selected materials and proposed concrete mix
designs.
2. Report mortar percentage of mix designs.
3. From each of these batches prepare and test six standard compression test cylinders, in
accordance with ASTM C 31 and ASTM C 39.
a. Test three cylinders at seven days and others at 28 days.
4. Prepare two beams for flexure strength from Type PA, PB, PC and FS batches in
accordance with ASTM C 31, ASTM C 78, and ASTM C 1609 for fiber reinforced concrete.
a. Test one beam at seven days and other at 28 days.
5. Submit reports of these tests with reports on mix design.
L.
After mix designs have been submitted and reviewed and at time of starting concreting
operations, have laboratory check field mix (based on accepted concrete mix design) at which
time report, for review by DESIGN PROFESSIONAL, necessary adjustments and final
proportions of materials.
1. Notwithstanding acceptance of mix design by DESIGN PROFESSIONAL, CONTRACTOR
shall be responsible for producing concrete used in work complying with these
Specifications.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Testing and Inspection Services.

1. Testing service will make one set of four test cylinders for every 100 cubic yards or less of
each type of concrete placed each day.
B.
Cement.
1. CONTRACTOR shall have accepted testing laboratory sample, test, and submit reports
certifying cement is in accordance with requirements of these Specifications before using.
2. The following tests will be required.
a. Complete chemical analysis to ascertain percentage of constituents, including
tri-calcium aluminate, as specified, regardless of type of cement specified, and
performing of physical tests, including 28-day tensile and compressive strength tests,
as specified both in accordance with ASTM C 150 according to type of cement to be
used.
b. Determination of Total Alkali Content of Cement.
1) Total alkali in cement shall be expressed as sodium oxide equivalent which is
percentage of sodium oxide plus 0.658 times the percentage of potassium
oxide.
2) Cement having total alkali in excess of 0.60 percent shall not be used with
aggregates that are potentially reactive with cement alkalies.
c. Do not use portland cement having false set, as determined by ASTM C 359.
3. Cement remaining in storage for more than 90 days after completion of tests shall be
retested before use and will be rejected if it fails to meet requirements of the
Specifications.
4. When in opinion of DESIGN PROFESSIONAL it is advisable, CONTRACTOR shall take
samples of cement from jobsite storage or ready mix plant and make tests of cements at
own expense.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 3000 - 7
C.
Aggregate Testing.
1. Sodium sulfate accelerated test.
2. Reactivity with cement alkalies.
3. Specific Gravity: Submit for information.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Forms.
1. Construct and remove formwork and shoring in accordance with ACI 347R, and
requirements of Occupational Health and Safety Act.
2. Construct and properly brace forms.
3. Brace: True and rigid, both laterally and diagonally for sufficient strength to support dead
weight of form construction and weight of fluid concrete without displacement.
4. For exposed concrete, construct formwork of plyform grade plywood or other acceptable
smooth surface form material of correct thickness for respective uses.
5. Assemble formwork with tight joints and clamp to prevent concrete leakage.
6. To avoid producing surface defects, thoroughly clean formwork and repair damage before
reuse.
7. Provide bulkheads to form construction joints at locations indicated on drawings and
wherever interruptions of continuous pour are required.
8. Include openings at base of narrow deep form structures to allow for cleaning and
inspection.
9. Form recesses or openings in work.
10. For exposed surfaces, coat forms with nonstaining material prior to placing of steel
reinforcement or concrete to prevent absorption of moisture and bond with concrete.
11. For unexposed surfaces, thoroughly wet forms immediately before placing concrete.
12. Arrange bolts and rods used for internal ties so metal will be not less than 1 inch from wall
when forms are removed.
13. Where concrete surface will be exposed to weathering and discoloration is objectionable,
do not use wire ties
14. Build into construction, embedded items, inserts, nailing strips, anchor slots, grounding
connections, and accessories furnished in this or other Specification sections.
a. Cooperate fully with steel, mason, and other contractors for coordination with their
work.
15. Grout tie rod holes.
16. Cutting and drilling.
a. Fabricate openings in concrete for electrical conduits and pipe sleeves.
b. Cutting of concrete for openings after construction will not be allowed.
c. Before cutting or drilling surfaces where appearance or strength of concrete could be
compromised, obtain acceptance of DESIGN PROFESSIONAL.
17. Removal.
a. Remove formwork to ensure complete safety of the structure.
b. In accordance with ACI 301 and 318.
B.
Reinforcing Steel.
1. Free from paint, oil, dirt, scale, and excessive rust.
2. Place in accordance with Structural and Architectural Drawings.
3. Furnish templates to hold steel in place if necessary.
4. Set column dowels to template, prior to placement of concrete at columns.
5. Do not push dowels into wet concrete.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 3000 - 8
6.
7.
8.
9.
Splices.
a. Avoid at points of maximum stress in reinforcement of flexural members.
b. Lapped splices: Length not less than according to grade of steel used.
Welded splices.
a. Where used, develop strength in accordance with ACI 318.
b. Welding materials and processes: In accordance with AWS D1.4.
c. Crossing bars: Do not tack weld to main reinforcement bars.
Use chairs or other devices to hold reinforcement in accurate position to space bars both
horizontally and vertically, and sufficiently rigid to avoid displacement of bars in placing
and vibrating concrete.
Detail reinforcing steel in accordance with ACI SP-66, except where Contract Documents
indicate differently.
C.
Concrete protection of reinforcing steel.

1. In accordance with ACI 318, Section 7.7 Concrete Protection for Reinforcement, unless
otherwise specified, indicated, or required by local authorities having jurisdiction.
2. At concrete surfaces exposed to weather after removal of forms, not less than 1-1/2
inches.
D.
Bonding Concrete to Existing Concrete

1. Where new concrete is to be bonded to existing or previously placed concrete, prepare
existing surface by cleaning with steel bush, applying water to create saturated surface
dry condition and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Concrete.
1. In accordance with ACI 301, and ACI 318, except as modified by this Specification.
2. Requirements for materials, procedures, and strengths set forth are maximum or
minimum, as case may be.
3. Recognize quality concrete is dependent upon proper selection and proportioning of
materials, characteristics which vary with manufacturer or source, and certain
characteristics of materials are conducive to excessive shrinkage and other defects in
concrete.
4. Do not place concrete until mix designs have been submitted and accepted by DESIGN
PROFESSIONAL.
5. If excessive variations from compressive strengths and other characteristics determined
from accepted mix designs indicating lack of control or changes in accepted materials or
quantities are determined by DESIGN PROFESSIONAL
a. Make corrections necessary, including changes in materials and source of supply
b. Arrange for required laboratory tests to maintain characteristics of accepted mix
designs.
6. Ready mixed concrete.
a. Batch, mix, and transport in accordance with ASTM C 94, except as modified by
supplemental requirements of this specification section and ACI 301.
b. Accompany each delivery of concrete with form in duplicate (one for DESIGN
PROFESSIONAL and one for CONTRACTOR) certifying concrete complies with
Specifications and accepted mix design, or supplier's delivery form, in duplicate, may
be signed by laboratory inspector to certify acceptance.
c. Inspector will ensure materials, including total water content, are correctly
proportioned and comply with Specifications and accepted mix design.
d. Plant furnishing ready mixed concrete shall have sufficient capacity to meet Contract
requirements, adequate storage and handling facilities for material, and shall be
equipped for accurate weighing, measuring, and control of materials, quantities,
mixing, and delivery of concrete meeting requirements specified.
e. Measuring and weighing equipment shall have recent seal of approval as to accuracy
by authorized inspection department of weights and measures.
f.
Concrete mixed completely in truck mixer shall be hauled and mixed in accepted type
of mixer having watertight container in which segregation of materials will not take
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 3000 - 9
g.
h.
i.
j.
place during mixing and from which concrete with accepted slump can be freely
discharged.
Each mixer shall be equipped with suitable water storage tank or water measuring
device so constructed that after being adjusted for accepted quantity of water for
each batch the control can be locked or sealed by inspector.
Mixing operation shall begin within 30 minutes after cement has been intermingled
with aggregates.
When mixing time is exceeded or concrete is unsatisfactory, deliveries will be
rejected. Rejected concrete shall immediately be removed from premises.
Observe concrete being placed in presence of OWNER's Representative. If
concrete consistency is unsuitable for conditions under which it is being placed,
revise mix design to suit conditions.
F.
Temperature of materials when mixed.

1. Of individual materials including mixing water, at time of being placed in mixer: Not more
than 140 degrees F.
2. Of resultant mixture: Not more than 70 degrees F.
G.
Temperature of concrete as placed.

1. When atmospheric temperature is greater than 40 degrees F.: Not more than 90 degrees
F.
2. When atmospheric temperature is lower than 40 degrees F.: Between 55 and 70
degrees F.
H.
Admixtures.
1. Added by and under the total responsibility of concrete supplier.
2. After addition, make not less than 70 mixer revolutions to completely mix admixture with
concrete.
3. After 60 minutes from adding admixture, do not use concrete and immediately remove
from site.
I.
Placing.
1. Preparation.
a. Do not begin placing concrete until formwork, reinforcing steel, screeds, related work
to be built into concrete, and placement of sleeves and inserts meet requirements of
Contract Documents.
b. Clean area for concrete placement free of debris.
c. Clean and moisten surfaces where concrete will be placed.
d. Compact earth subgrades.
e. Apply coating material to steel forms.
f.
Apply coating material to wood forms or thoroughly wet (except in freezing weather).
g. Where bond is required, concrete surfaces shall be rough, free from loose material
and matter interfering with satisfactory bond.
1) Wash surfaces, scrub with steel brush or broom, and spread layer of cement
grout immediately before placing concrete.
2) Grout: Same cement-sand ratio as used in concrete.
h. Remove standing water before depositing concrete.
i.
Divert flow of water from excavation through side drains to sump or remove by other
acceptable methods to avoid washing freshly deposited concrete.
2. Conveying.
a. From mixer to forms as rapidly as practical using method which will not cause
segregation or loss of ingredients.
b. Deposit near final position.
c. Free vertical drop: Not more than 5 feet.
d. Use of chutes: Allowed if short in length, within forms to distribute concrete, and
slope is greater than 1 to 2.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 3000 - 10
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Pumping.
a. Prime pump with grout.
b. Do not pump concrete through aluminum pipe.
Depositing.
a. To avoid segregation, deposit concrete in horizontal layers, not more than 24 inches
thick, as near as practical to final position.
b. Deposit in continuous operation until section is complete.
1) If section cannot be placed continuously, construct and locate joints as
specified.
Vibrating
a. Use mechanical equipment.
b. Transmit vibration directly to concrete.
c. Where sections are thin and internal vibration impractical, use external vibration.
d. Frequency of vibration: Greater than 5000 cycles per minute.
e. Intensity: To cause flow or settlement of concrete.
f.
Duration: To accomplish thorough compaction, but not over vibrated.
g. Supplement by forking or spading by hand adjacent to forms on exposed surfaces to
produce smooth, dense, even surfaces.
Compact concrete into corners of forms, around reinforcement, and embedded fixtures.
When depositing concrete through reinforcement, avoid segregation of coarse aggregate.
Carry top surfaces not covered by forms, additional concrete, or backfill to levels indicated
and strike off by screed.
J.
Curing.
1. Refer to Section 03 3500 - Concrete Finishing, for additional requirements for curing slabs
on ground.
2. Water cure.
a. Refer to Architectural concrete work for provisions governing certain elements of the
work.
b. Protect concrete from injurious action by wind or sun.
c. Protect fresh concrete from heavy rains, flowing water, and mechanical injury.
d. Keep concrete wet for minimum of 7 days by covering with water or other acceptable
method to keep surfaces continuously wet.
e. Where wood forms are left in place for curing, keep forms wet to prevent opening at
joints and drying of concrete.
f.
Cover tops of walls and concrete surfaces left exposed by formwork.
g. Use clean water, free from elements which might cause staining or discoloration of
concrete.
h. In freezing weather, use steam or other satisfactory method.
K.
Hot weather.
1. In accordance with ACI 305R.
2. Control placing temperature to avoid loss of slump, flash set, or cold joints.
L.
Cold weather.
1. In accordance with ACI 306R, except as modified by supplemental requirements in this
Section.
2. When atmospheric temperatures fall below 40 degrees F., furnish necessary temporary
heat, protection, and enclosures to ensure fresh concrete will be kept at temperature not
less than 50 degrees F. for 7 days of curing.
3. Avoid excessive heating to prevent undue loss of moisture from concrete during curing
period.
4. At end of curing period, discontinue artificial heating and remove protections and
enclosures so fall in temperature in concrete will not exceed 40 degrees F. in 24 hours.
5. Admixture of calcium chloride is prohibited.
6. Record temperature of concrete in each placement at regular 8 hour time intervals.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 3000 - 11
7.
Frozen concrete will be rejected unless demonstrated to the satisfaction of the DESIGN
PROFESSIONAL that concrete meets requirements of the specifications by strength tests
of cores or by other acceptable methods.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Testing agency employed by Owner will perform field quality control tests.
B.
Field Inspection.
1. Coordinate work with field inspectors.
2. Notify field inspector, in writing, of concrete placement schedules prior to starting work.
C.
Assume responsibility for cost and delay of correcting rejected materials, both in regard to work
and delays affecting work of other contractors.
D.
The cost of additional testing shall be borne by CONTRACTOR when defective concrete is
identified.
3.04 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A.
Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances
or specified requirements.
B.
Concrete failing to meet this Specification:

1. Will be rejected.
2. Remove from premises and replace with concrete complying with these Specifications.
3. Remove other materials or work damaged in concrete removal process and replace with
materials complying with these Specifications.
4. For acceptance of concrete rejected only because of compressive strength:
a. Submit written request to DESIGN PROFESSIONAL for acceptance.
b. Upon receipt of written acceptance, perform accepted strength test and other tests
deemed necessary by DESIGN PROFESSIONAL and building department having
jurisdiction to determine acceptability.
c. If rejected concrete passes required tests and upon assumption of risks and
responsibility for rejected concrete, acceptance will be given.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect foundations, floors, and related surfaces during construction.
B.
Replace damaged or defective work and work under other Sections injured incidentally in
replacing of work.
C.
Patched work is unacceptable.

END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 3000 - 12
SECTION 03 5400
CAST UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Liquid-applied self-leveling floor underlayment.

1. Cementitious type.

A.
ASTM C 109/C 109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2008.
B.
ASTM C 348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars; 2008.
C.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2010.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets documenting physical characteristics and
product limitations of underlayment materials. Include information on surface preparation.
C.
Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

A.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years of documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Keep dry and protect from direct sun exposure, freezing, and ambient temperature greater than
105 degrees F.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A.
Conform to applicable code for combustibility or flame spread requirements.
B.
Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of

underlayment materials in the required fire rated assembly.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A.
Do not install underlayment until floor penetrations and peripheral work are complete.
B.
Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 degrees F 48 hours before, during and 72 hours
after installation of underlayment.
C.
During curing process, ventilate spaces to remove excess moisture.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Underlayment: Blended cement mix, that when mixed with water in accordance
with manufacturer's directions will produce self-leveling underlayment with the following
properties:
1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4000 psi after 28 days, tested per ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2. Flexural Strength: Minimum 1000 psi after 28 days, tested per ASTM C 348.
3. Density: Maximum 125 lb/cu ft.
4. Final Set Time: 1-1/2 to 2 hours, maximum.
5. Thickness: Feather edge to maximum 3-1/2 inch.
6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 0/0 in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
7. Underlayment (CUL-B), Trowelable, For General Use.
03243-00.000
CAST UNDERLAYMENT
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 5400 - 1
a.
Acceptable products.
1) Ardex Engineered Cements, Inc.: Ardex SD-P: www.ardex.com.
2) Dayton Superior Chemical Division: Sure Finish:
www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com.
3) Maxxon Corporation: Level-Right FeatherEdge: www.maxxon.com.
B.
Water: Potable and not detrimental to underlayment mix materials.
C.
Primer: Manufacturer's recommended type.
D.
Joint and Crack Filler: Latex based filler, as recommended by manufacturer.
2.02 MIXING
A.
Site mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Mix to self-leveling consistency without over-watering.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are clean, dry, unfrozen, do not contain petroleum bi-products, or
other compounds detrimental to underlayment material bond to substrate.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Concrete: Mechanically prepare steel troweled concrete to create a textured surface necessary
to achieve the best bond; acceptable methods include bead blasting and scarifying. Do not use
acid etching.
B.
Remove substrate surface irregularities. Fill voids and deck joints with filler. Finish smooth.
C.
Vacuum clean surfaces.
D.
Prime substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow to dry.
E.
Close floor openings.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Place material onto substrate. Do not retemper or add water.
C.
Place and screed while the material is still highly flowable.
D.
Be careful not to create cold joints.
E.
Wear spiked shoes while working in the wet material to avoid leaving marks.
F.
Place to indicated thickness, with top surface level to 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
G.
For final thickness over 1-1/2 inches, place underlayment in layers. Allow initial layer to harden
to point where material has lost its evaporative moisture. Immediately prime and begin
application of subsequent layer within 24 hours.
H.
Place before partition installation.
I.
Where additional aggregate has been used in mix, add top layer of neat mix (without
aggregate), if needed to level and smooth surface.
J.
If fine, feathered edge is desired, steel trowel edge after initial set, but before it is completely
hard.
K.
Slope floors with smooth transitions to floor drains.
L.
Underlayment (CUL-B), Trowelable, For General Use.

1. Use to build up thickness or form flat, level and smooth base surface.
2. Apply in single layers from featheredge to not greater than 1 inch.
3. Substrate shall be solid, clean and free of oil, grease, wax, latex compounds, curing
compounds, dust and foreign matter.
4. Prime substrate with primer recommended by manufacturer.
5. Mix underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
03243-00.000
CAST UNDERLAYMENT
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 5400 - 2
6.
7.
8.
Add well washed and fine graded sand for thicknesses over 1/2 inch.
Apply with float to level.
When underlayment starts to harden, steel trowel to required smoothness.
3.04 CURING
A.
Once underlayment starts to set, prohibit foot traffic until final set has been reached.
B.
Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

A.
Independent testing agency will perform field inspection and testing.
B.
Placed Material: Agency will inspect and test for conformance to specification requirements.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Protect against direct sunlight, heat, and wind; prevent rapid drying to avoid shrinkage and
cracking.
B.
Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor underlayment surfaces.

END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
CAST UNDERLAYMENT
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
03 5400 - 3
SECTION 04 2000
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Concrete Block.
B.
Mortar and Grout.
C.
Reinforcement and Anchorage.
D.
Flashings.
E.
Lintels.
F.
Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Nailing strips built into masonry.
B.
Section 07 8413 - Firestopping: Firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated masonry and at top

of fire-rated walls.
C.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.
1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A.
See Section 012100 - Allowances, for cash allowances affecting this section.

A.
ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures;
American Concrete Institute International; 2009.
B.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
C.
ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement;
2007.
D.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
E.
ASTM A580/A580M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire; 2008.
F.
ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b.
G.
ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire;
2009a.
H.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010.
I.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
J.
ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2011.
K.
ASTM C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2005.
L.
ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2006.
M. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and
Related Units; 2011.
N.
ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2004.
O.
ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2011.
P.
ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006.
Q.
ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2010.
R.
ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2007.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 1
S.
ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.
T.
ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of
Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2010.
U.
ASTM C1148 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Drying Shrinkage of Masonry Mortar;
1992a (Reapproved 2008) .
V.
ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2010.
W. ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength; 2009.
X.
ASTM E514 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry ;
2009.
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section; require attendance by all relevant installers.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, mortar, and masonry accessories.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that water repellent admixture manufacturer has certified
masonry unit manufacturer as an approved user of water repellent admixture in the
manufacture of concrete block.
E.
Test Reports: Concrete masonry manufacturer's test reports for units with integral water
repellent admixture.
F.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

A.
Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the
contract documents.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.

A.
Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and
contamination by other materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:

1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches (400 x 200 mm) and
nominal depth of 8 inches (200 mm).
2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
b. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture where indicated.
c. Pattern: Vertical single score.
3. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
b. Lightweight.
2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N.

1. Colored mortar: Premixed cement as required to match Architect's color sample.
2. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 2
1.
Not more than 0.60 percent alkali.
C.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
D.
Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.
E.
Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
F.
Water: Clean and potable.
G.
Integral Water Repellent Admixture for Mortar and Grout: Polymeric liquid admixture added to
mortar and grout at the time of manufacture.
1. Performance of Mortar and Grout with Integral Water Repellent:
a. Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514 for a minimum of 72 hours.
1) No water visible on back of wall above flashing at the end of 24 hours.
2) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.032 gallons per hour
(0.05 L per hour) at the end of 24 hours.
3) No more than 25% of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of test.
b. Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1357; minimum 10% increase.
c. Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5% decrease.
d. Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5% increase in shrinkage.
2. Use only in combination with masonry units produced with integral water repellent
admixture.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A.
Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors:

1. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.
2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.
3. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280) deformed billet bars; galvanized.
C.
Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is
involved and truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Adjustable Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type with adjustable ties or tabs spaced
at 16 in (406 mm) on center and fabricated with moisture drip; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot
dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/153M, Class B; 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm) side rods
with 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) cross rods and adjustable components of 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm) wire;
width of components as required to provide not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not less than 1/2
inch (13 mm) of mortar coverage from each masonry face.
1. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
E.
Wall Ties: Corrugated formed sheet metal, 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide by 0.05 inch (1.22 mm)
thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not more than 1
inch (25 mm) and not less than 1 inch (25 mm) of mortar coverage from masonry face.
2.04 FLASHINGS
A.
Galvanized Steel Flashing: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating, 24 gage (0.61 mm)
total thickness.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused
joints.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.
b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand); www.h-b.com.
c. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 3
B.
Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.
1. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.
2. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N.
3. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.
4. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type O.
B.
Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's
sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio.
C.
New Mortar for Old Block: Proportioned by volume only; not more than 20 percent of the total
volume of Portland cement and lime combined shall be Portland cement.
1. Sand: Match original mortar as closely as possible in color, size, and texture, without use
of other additives.
2. Do not use modern additives unless permitted in writing by Architect.
3. Repointing Mortar: Use proportions from 1 part lime to 2 parts sand with no Portland
cement, up to 2 parts Portland cement to 3 parts lime to 6 parts sand.
4. White Portland Cement: Use for repointing mortar where Portland cement is permitted.
5. Use mortar within 30 minutes after final mixing; do not add more water after the initial mix
is prepared.
D.
Grout: ASTM C476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting;
fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches (50 mm) or less; coarse
grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches (50 mm).
E.
Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
F.
Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B.
Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C.
Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.
B.
Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

A.
Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is

more stringent.
3.04 COURSING
A.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B.
Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C.
Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches (200 mm).
3. Mortar Joints: Concave.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 4
3.05 PLACING AND BONDING

A.
Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other
work.
B.
Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
C.
Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D.
Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
E.
Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids,
sandblasting or high pressure cleaning methods.
F.
Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond.
G.
Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must
be made, remove mortar and replace.
H.
Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped
edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
I.
Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.
J.
Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as
indicated.
K.
Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or
decks with compressible joint filler.
3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL

A.
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal
joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center.
B.
Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening.
C.
Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).
3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - CAVITY WALL MASONRY

A.
Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center.
B.
Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of openings.
C.
Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).
E.
Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches (400 mm) on center.
3.08 MASONRY FLASHINGS

A.
Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.
1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches (100 mm) into
adjacent masonry or turn up at least 4 inches (100 mm) to form watertight pan at
non-masonry construction.
2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings.
3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar.
B.
Extend metal flashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. Install joint
sealer below drip edge to prevent moisture migration under flashing.
3.09 LINTELS
A.
Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are
not scheduled.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Openings to 42 inches (1070 mm): Place two, No. 3 (M9) reinforcing bars 1 inch (25 mm)
from bottom web.
Openings from 42 inches (1070 mm) to 78 inches (1980 mm): Place two, No. 5 (M16)
reinforcing bars 1 inch (25 mm) from bottom web.
Openings over 78 inches (1980 mm): Reinforce openings as detailed.
Do not splice reinforcing bars.
Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch
(13 mm) of dimensioned position.
Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports.
3.10 GROUTED COMPONENTS

A.
Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
B.
Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch (13
mm) of dimensioned position.
C.
Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
D.
At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches (300 mm) either
side of opening.
3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A.
Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.
B.
Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow
contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit
faces for placement of backer rod and sealant.
C.
Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Size control joint in accordance with Section 079005 for sealant performance.
E.
Form expansion joint as detailed.
3.12 BUILT-IN WORK

A.
As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work
and furnished under other sections.
B.
Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.
C.
Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid
with grout.
1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches (300 mm) from framed
openings.
D.
Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration.
3.13 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
B.
Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m) and 1/2 inch in 20 ft (13
mm/6 m) or more.
C.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch (13 mm)
in two stories or more.
D.
Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/m) and 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6
mm/3 m); 1/2 inch in 30 ft (13 mm/9 m).
E.
Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/m).
F.
Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 6
3.14 CUTTING AND FITTING

A.
Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or
strength of masonry work may be impaired.

A.
An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section
014000.
B.
Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of concrete unit masonry in accordance with
ASTM C140 for conformance to requirements of this specification.
C.
Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with ASTM C780, testing with same
frequency as masonry samples.
3.16 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B.
Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.17 PROTECTION
A.
Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that
are subject to damage by construction activities.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 7
SECTION 05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
AISC (COMM) - Commentary on the Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable

Stress Design and Plastic Design; 1999.
B.
AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2005.
C.
ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
D.
ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength; 2009a.
E.
ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa
Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009.
F.
AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;
American Welding Society; 2007.
G.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
H.
SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004).
I.
SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
For Review.
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage,
size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and
details where applicable.
a. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate
net weld lengths.
b. Metal (miscellaneous iron) fabrications.
1)
Loose steel lintels.
2) Miscellaneous iron (steel) components.
3) Support for overhead equipment.
C.
For Information.
1. Product Data.
a. Manufactured steel items.
2. Certificates.
a. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project,
verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

A.
Unless otherwise specified or superseded by local building or state codes, detail, fabricate, and
erect metal fabrications in accordance with AISC Specification, Code, and Detailing Manual.
B.
Qualifications.
1. Design Professional (Specialty Structural Engineer).
a. Accepts responsibility for design of equipment support channels.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL
A.
Lightest standard section rolled for each shape to fabricate components, unless details
designate weight, then use that weight.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 1
B.
Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:.
D.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.
E.
Shop Prime Paint.

1. Free of heavy metal compounds (lead and chromate).
2. Vehicle, solvent based with sufficient water solubility and reactivity with metal substrate,
and soluble enough for sufficient ions to react with and passivate metal surface.
a. Devguard 4160 (white) by Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com.
b. Interlac 573 (white) by International Protective Coatings: www.international-pc.com.
c. Series 10 Primers (white) by Tnemec Company, Inc.: www.tnemec.com.
4. Effective to protect steel against atmospheric corrosion during storage (at fabricator's
shop, in warehouse, and at jobsite), during transit, and while in place at building site, until
steel units are protected from weather by building enclosure, for minimum of four months
exposure after erection.
5. Film thickness on steel surfaces equal to or greater than wet or dry film thickness required
by paint manufacturer's literature or as required by above criteria.
2.02 FABRICATION
A.
Members without twists, bends, open joints, misalignment, ragged edges.
B.
Miters and joints accurately cut and fit.
C.
Members true to length for assembly without fillers.
D.
Exposed surfaces free of mill scale, rust, pits, craters, burrs, and other irregularities.
E.
Completed assembly strong, rigid, and neat in appearance.
F.
Bevel splice plates at a change in width of adjacent members.
G.
Fabrication and erection tolerances associated with structural steel are considered excessive
and will not be accepted.
H.
Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
I.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
J.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
K.
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
L.
Shop Connections.
1. Welded, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
2. In accordance with following criteria.
3. Welding.
a. Steel in accordance with AWS D1.1.
b. Shop weld by shielded metal arc, gas metal arc with carbon dioxide shielding,
submerged arc welding, flux cored arc welding process.
c. Use shielded arc electrodes not over 3/16 inch diameter.
d. Use properly qualified operators skilled in making strong, neat welds with this
electrode.
e. Join parts in as close contact as possible with size of weld increased by amount of
separation if separation exceeds 1/16 inch.
f.
Remove loose slag, scale, rust, grease, paint, other foreign material to expose clean
steel surfaces for welding.
g. Weld shall be sufficient size and length to develop required stresses with minimum
size of weld to transmit stresses of 3/16 inch.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 2
h.
i.
j.
k.
4.
Continuous and watertight at exterior members.

Grind smooth with surfaces of members where exposed.
If welding is not applicable, use bolts.
Where design calls for welding of two elements of different thickness and where
these thicknesses are incompatible for proper welding, properly connect angles or
plates of proper thickness ratio.
l.
Use necessary jigs and clamps to prevent distortion during welding.
m. Employ procedures to prevent undercutting, insufficient throat or leg, lack of fusion,
spattering.
n. Bring parts to be fillet welded in as close contact as practicable.
o. Size of fillet weld shall be such that stresses in adjacent base material do not exceed
allowable value for this material.
Bolting.
a. Accurately space holes for bolts using diameter 1/16 inch greater than nominal
diameter of bolt.
b. Drill material having thickness in excess of bolt diameter, plus or minus 1/8 inch, and
material 7/8 inch thick or greater.
c. Use not less than two bolts at each component connection.
d. Space bolts at not more than 2 feet on centers, unless otherwise indicated on
drawings.
e. Use bolts that project not more than 1/4 inch beyond face of nut.
f.
Use 3/4 inch diameter machine bolts, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
M. Connection of Wood Nailers.

1. Use threaded stud bolts.
2. Diameter: 3/8 inch.
3. Length: Thickness of wood.
4. Spacing: Stagger at 15 inches on center to approximately 1-1/2 inch from outer edge of
flange or nailer.
5. Weld to steel members.
2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS
A.
Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: prime
paint finish.
B.
Lintels: As detailed; prime paint finish.

1. Fabricate to shapes and sizes indicated on drawings.
2. Bear not less than 8 inches on each end.
3. Cope horizontal legs to allow 3/4 inch minimum mortar in joint.
4. Prime painted at exterior locations.
C.
Miscellaneous Iron (Steel) Components.

1. Furnish and install other items of steel.
a. Which are shown on drawings but not specifically mentioned.
b. Not furnished in other sections of Specification.
2. Prime painted at interior locations.
D. Supports for Overhead Equipment
1. Attach to or hang and brace from building structure.
2. For equipment mounted on extension arms or rotatable assemblies, design system of
braces to prevent movement or displacement of mounting end assembly when equipment is in
normal use.
3. Furnish and install for ceiling service columns.
4. Acceptable manufacturers.
Unistrut Building Systems, Wayne, Michigan 48184: www.unistrut.com
Versabar Corporation, Patterson, New Jersey 07522: www.versabar.com
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 Product Requirements.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 3
2.04 FINISHES - STEEL

A.
Prime Paint all Steel Items.
B.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
1. Exterior items: SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
2. Interior items not receiving high-performance coatings: SSPC-SP 3, Power Tool
Cleaning.
C.
Prime Painting: Two coats.

1. Apply one coat of shop prime paint before leaving shop.
2. Apply two coats of shop prime paint before assembling on surfaces that will be
inaccessible for painting after assembling.
3. Apply paint with smooth and even surfaces suitable to receive field coat of paint.
2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A.
Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B.
Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.
D.
Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.
E.
Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Take measurements at site and not from scale drawings.
B.
Inspect site and become familiar with conditions before starting installation.
C.
Make careful study of drawings and become familiar with work constructed by other before and
during erection of this work.
D.
Make allowances in method of erection and distribution of materials before and during erection
for obstructions which may be encountered resulting from work of others.
E.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B.
Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into
concrete or embedded in masonry.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Join components together with tight, even joints for good appearance.
C.
Anchor and secure components if not listed under heading, Products Furnished But Not
Installed Under This Section.
D.
Furnish and install lugs, connections, bearing plates, anchors, and bolts required for erection.
E.
Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
F.
Drill Holes for Connecting Components.
G.
Field weld components unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
H.
Perform Field Welding in Accordance With AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
I.
Anchorage of Components to Concrete.
J.
Anchorage of Components to Masonry.

1. Use embedded anchors.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 4
a.
2.
Minimum 1-1/2 inch by 1/4 inch by 8 inch long strap, with hooked end, welded to back
of member, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
b. Weld to back of component at 2 feet on centers, unless otherwise indicated on
drawings.
Anchor components to masonry with through-bolts.
a. 1/2 inch diameter with rear plate 4 inches by 4 inches by 3/8 inch thick.
b. Where through bolts are inaccessible, anchor to solid masonry with expansive screw
anchors and to hollow core masonry with toggle bolts.
K.
Powder-actuated anchors will not be approved.
L.
Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
M. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized , except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with method specified under heading, Finishes - Steel.
2. After erection, bolts, nuts, welds, and unpainted areas with one coat of same paint as
shop coat.
3. Areas of paint damaged during shipping and erection with one coat of same paint as shop
coat.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 5
SECTION 06 1000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Subflooring.
B.
Preservative treated wood materials.
C.
Fire retardant treated wood materials.
D.
Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
E.
Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds.

A.
Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for
wood framing.

A.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
B.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a.
C.
ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated

Wood for Fire Testing; 2010.
D.
ASTM D5516 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Flexural Properties of Fire-Retardant
Treated Softwood Polywood Exposed to Elevated Temperatures; 2009.
E.
ASTM D5664 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire-Retardant Treatments
and Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber; 2010.
F.
ASTM D6841 - Standard Practice for Calculating Design Value Treatment Adjustment Factors
for Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber; 2008.
G.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2010b.
H.
AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood
Protection Association; 2010.
I.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology

(Department of Commerce); 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
For Information.
1. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application
instructions.
C.
For Review.
1. Shop Drawings: Including, but not limited to: Expansion joints.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or
exceed specified requirements.
E.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
F.
Certificates.
1. Decay retardant treatment.
2. Fire retardant treatment.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 1

A.
General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and to allow air circulation.
B.
Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or
installation.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.

1. If species is not specified, provide any species graded by agency specified; if grading
agency is not specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting specified
requirements.
2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by Board of Review,
American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service
for species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance
characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.
B.
Materials: Best of their respective kinds, air seasoned or kiln dried to moisture content of 19
percent or less.
C.
Each piece of framing and board lumber shall bear official grademark of applicable producer
association or inspection bureau under rules of which lumber is manufactured, graded, and
purchased.
D.
Lumber: Surfaced four sides.
E.
Back face of wood members, 7-1/4 inches or more in single width: Kerfed on back face to
prevent warping.
F.
Formwork for concrete structures is excluded from this section.
G.
Furnish mechanical fastening devices, such as nails, screws, bolts, washers, and nuts,
necessary to secure rough carpentry components to concrete, masonry, steel, sheet metal, or
similar base.
H.
Minimum Grade: No. 3 common.
I.
Finger-jointed lumber may be used in same applications as solid lumber of equivalent species
and grade if finger-jointed lumber meets requirements of certification and quality control
programs of rules writing agency having jurisdiction.
J.
Size members to dimensions designated or built up of lumber to suit.
K.
Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS

A.
Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
B.
Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
C.
Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring.

1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A.
Subflooring: APA PRP-108: Rated Sheathing.

1. Exposure Class: Exterior.
2. Span Rating: 32/16 inches.
3. Thickness: 3/4 inch, nominal.
03243-00.000
ALBERT KAHN ASSOCIATES, INC.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 2
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Anchors.

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity
and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
B.
Subfloor Glue: Waterproof, water base, air cure type, cartridge dispensed.
2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A.
Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System
for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific
applications.
1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating
compliance with specified requirements.
a. For exposed wood indicated to receive stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece.
2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by ALSCaccredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA
standards.
B.
Fire Retardant Treatment.

1. Affix Underwriters Laboratories Inc. classification marking FR-S and numerical rating to
each piece of wood.
2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
3. Manufacturers.
a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc: www.wolmanizedwood.com.
b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc: www.frtw.com.
c. Osmose, Inc: www.osmose.com.
4. Exterior Type (FRW EXT/FRP EXT): AWPA Use Category UCFB, Commodity
Specification H (Treatment C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood), chemically treated and
pressure impregnated; capable of providing maximum flame spread rating of 25 when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84, without evidence of significant progressive
combustion when test is extended for additional 20 minutes both before and after
accelerated weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D2898, and with flame
front extending not more than 10.5 feet beyond centerline of test burners during test.
a. Loss of structural properties below acceptable limits when tested for exposure to
elevated temperatures in accordance with ASTM D5516 for plywood and D5664 for
lumber.
b. Calculate design value adjustment factors in accordance with ASTM D 6841 for
treated lumber.
c. Kiln dry wood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber
and 15 percent for plywood.
d. Do not use exterior fire retardant treated wood in direct contact with ground.
5. Interior Type A (FRW/FRP): AWPA Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H
(Treatment C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood), low temperature (low hygroscopic) type,
chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing maximum flame
spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, without evidence of
significant progressive combustion when test is extended for additional 20 minutes, and
with flame front extending not more than 10.5 feet beyond centerline of test burners during
test.
a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber
and 15 percent for plywood.
b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated.
c. Do not use interior fire retardant treated wood in applications exposed to weather or
where wood may become wet.
03243-00.000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 3
C.
Preservative Treatment.
1. Apply to components indicated.
2. Do not expose ripped surfaces of treated wood to weather.
3. Heavily coat ripped, cut, and drilled surfaces of treated wood with preservative used in
treatment.
4. Affix brand mark denoting conformance with treatment standards specified to each piece
of treated wood delivered to site.
5. Manufacturers.
a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc.: www.wolmanizedwood.com.
b. Viance, LLC: www.treatedwood.com.
c. Osmose, Inc.: www.osmose.com.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B.
Reuse scrap to greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C.
Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately
after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A.
Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
B.
In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required
by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top
story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used instead of
solid wood blocking.
C.
In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for
anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.
D.
In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,
unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is
explicitly indicated.
E.
Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above

ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.
F.
Specifically, provide following nonstructural framing and blocking.

1. Cabinets and shelf supports.
2. Wall brackets.
3. Handrails.
4. Grab bars.
5. Towel and bath accessories.
6. Wall-mounted door stops.
7. Chalkboards and marker boards.
8. Wall paneling and trim.
9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A.
Subflooring: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted.
B.
Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm
bearing and staggered, using screws.
03243-00.000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 4
C.
Gypsum Board Sheathing.

1. Examine subframing, verify that surfaces of framing and furring members to receive
sheathing do not vary more than 1/8 inch from adjacent members.
2. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable instructions from GA253, bright side outward.
3. Use maximum lengths possible to minimize number of joints.
4. Locate edge on and parallel to vertical framing members.
5. Stagger intermediate end joints of adjacent panels.
6. Anchor to framing members at maximum 8 inches on center at perimeter and in field.
7. Locate fasteners minimum 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels.
8. Drive fasteners to bear tight against and flush with surface of sheathing, do not
countersink fasteners.
9. At panel joints, embed joint tape in joint compound, cover with separate coat, and tool
smooth.
D.
Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with
edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and
into studs in field of board.
1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of fire-rated assembly.
2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board
parallel to studs.
3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.
4. Communications Room(s) Panels.
a. Install on rear and side wall of telecommunications rooms.
b. Extend panels to 8 feet above finished floor.
c. Install panels with anchors suited to wall construction.
5. Electrical Room Mounting Boards.
a. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.
B.
Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet
maximum.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Waste Disposal: Comply with requirements of Section 01 7419.

1. Comply with applicable regulations.
2. Do not burn scrap on project site.
3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.
4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation
facilities or waste-to-energy facilities.
B.
Do not leave wood, shavings, sawdust, etc., on ground or buried in fill.
C.
Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering storm drainage system.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 5
SECTION 06 4100
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Custom fabricated cabinet units (millwork).

1. Plastic Laminate Countertops.
2. Plastic Laminate Base and Wall Cabinets.
3. Cabinet Hardware.
4. Finish Carpentry Items.
5. Preparation for Installing Utilities.
6. Plastic Laminate Cabinetry as Shown on Drawings.

A.
Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
C.
Section 09 9100 - Painting: Site finishing of cabinet exterior.
D.
Section 12 3520 - Casework - Wood Specialty: Factory fabricated modular cabinet units.
E.
Section 12 3600 - Countertops.

A.
ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004.
B.
ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 1999.
C.
ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2002.
D.
2008.
E.
ASTM G 22 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria; 1976

(Reapproved 1996).
F.
AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural

Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th
Ed., Version 2.0.
G.
BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).
H.
GSA CID A-A-1936 - Adhesive, Contact, Neoprene Rubber; Federal Specifications and
Standards; Revision A, 1996.
I.
NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers

Association; 2005.
J.
NHLA G-101 - Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress; National
Hardwood Lumber Association; 2007.
K.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007.
L.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology

(Department of Commerce); 2005.
M. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

06 4100 - 1
N.
USGBC LEED-NC 2009 - LEED Green Building Rating System for New Construction and Major
Renovations; U.S. Green Building Council; 2002, revised 2009.
O.
WI (MAN) - Manual of Millwork; Woodwork Institute; 2003.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
For Information.
1. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
C.
Submit Shop Drawings to Architect prior to ordering any materials.
D.
For Review.
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods,
joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of
finishes.
2. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 8 inches
square, illustrating proposed cabinet substrate and finish.
3. Samples for Verification: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls and hinges,
demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.

A.
Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards

Illustrated, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items.
B.
Shop shall be a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum ten years of documented experience on projects of similar size and
quality to this project and with adequate engineering, production and financial capability to
produce this job without causing delay..
D.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Member in good standing of the Architectural Woodwork Institute

(AWI) and familiar with the AWI/AWMAC QSI.
E.
Quality Certification: Provide inspection and quality certification of completed custom cabinets in
accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Certification Program.
F.
Casework and millwork shall be furnished by a single-source manufacturer in order to provide

undivided responsibility for all woodwork, including fabrication and finishing.
G.
Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of casework and millwork required to be

fitted to other construction, obtain measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing detail
for accurate fit.
1. Where sequence of measuring substrates before fabrication (without field measurements)
and provide ample borders and edges to allow for subsequent scribing and trimming of
casework and millwork for accurate fit.

A.
Protect units from moisture damage according to AWI Quality Standards, Section 1700,
Installation.

A.
During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in
building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

06 4100 - 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A.
Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

B.
Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 6000.
C.
Provide wood harvested within 500 mile radius of project site.
2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS

A.
Hardwood Lumber: Graded in accordance with AWI Quality Standards for Grade of Work
specified; red oak species, plain sawn, average moisture content of 6-8 percent; with plain sawn
grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.
2.03 PANEL MATERIALS

A.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; medium density industrial type as specified in AWI/AWMAC

Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, composed of wood chips bonded with
moisture resistant adhesive under heat and pressure; sanded faces; thickness as required; use
for all components not indicated as another material.
B.
Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC

Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded
with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required.
C.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inch
thick, smooth two sides (S2S); use for dust panels and other components indicated on drawings.
D.
PVC Edgebanding: Use on all plastic laminate countertop edges, drawer front edges, door front
edges, backsplash and side splash.
2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS

A.
Manufacturers:
1. Panolam Industries: 203.925.1556; www.panolam.com; Shelton,
Deborah Emory, 770.845.6673, deborah_emery@panolam.com.
2. Wilsonart: 1.800.272.6486; www.wilsonart.com; Temple, TX. Jennifer Poole,
205.413.5553, jpoole@unitedplywoods.com. As scheduled; refer to Finish Schedule.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific
applications.
1. Provide specific types as scheduled.
2. Horizontal Surfaces - General Purpose (PLM-G): HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, colors
as scheduled, finish as scheduled.
3. Horizontal Surfaces - Shelves: HGL, 0.039 inch nominal thickness, colors as scheduled,
finish as scheduled.
4. Vertical Surfaces (PLM-G): VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, colors as scheduled, finish
as scheduled.
5. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, colors as scheduled, finish as scheduled.
6. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to
concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate.
2.05 EDGE BANDING MATERIALS

A.
Manufacturers:
1. Charter Industries: Bob Floyd, 800.538.9088 x 301, www.charterindustries.com, as
scheduled; refer to Finish Schedule.
2. Canplast; 800.277.8888, H.G.H. Hardware Supply, www.canplast.com.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

06 4100 - 3
2.06 COUNTERTOPS
A.
Plastic Laminate Countertops: Medium density fiberboard substrate covered with HPDL,
conventionally fabricated and self-edge banded with coved integral backsplash.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI/AWMAC to suit application.
B.
Fasteners: Size and type to suit application, concealed from view.
C.
Bolts, Nuts, Washer, Lags, Pins and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; stainless steel;
provide samples of proposed fasteners and misc. hardware for approval unless noted otherwise
on drawings.
D.
Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
E.
Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, flat shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of
width to match component thickness, 3MM size and color as indicated on Finish Schedule.
1. Use at all exposed plywood edges, excluding transaction counter at reception and nurse
station.
2.08 HARDWARE
A.
Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as indicated for quality grade specified.
B.
Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf
standards, multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, satin chrome finish, for
nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments.
1. Product: To be submitted and approved by Architect.
C.
Drawer and Door Pulls.

1. Bar Pull type: 1 inch finger clearance, 3.78 inch center-to-center spacing, 15/32 inch
diameter, ADA Compliant.
a. Acceptable products.
1) No. 117.05.600 by Hafele America Co., Archdale, North Carolina 27263
www.hafele.com, 1-800-423-3531.
2) No. BP096-SS by The Engineered Products Company, Flint, Michigan 48501
www.epcohardware.com, 1-888-414-3726.
3) No. DP55A by Doug Mockett & Company Inc., Torrance, California 90501,
www.mockett.com, 1-800-523-1269.
4) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
D.
Drawer slides.
1. Type: Full extension, precision steel ball bearings, cold-rolled slide members on all
drawers.
2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade; Heavy duty grade required by drawer size.
3. Mounting: Side mounted.
4. Features: Provide self-closing/ stay closed type.
5. Stops: Integral type.
6. Load Rating: 150 pound, drawer removal without use of tools.
1) No. 3320 by Hettich America, L.P., Alpharetta, Georgia 30005
www2.hettichamerica.com, 770-887-3733.
2) No. 8500 by Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Co., Grand Rapids, Michigan 49505
www.knapeandvogt.com, 800 253 1561.
3) No. 9301 by Accuride International, Inc., Santa Fe Springs, California 90670
www.accuride.com, 562-903-0200.
E.
Cabinet door pivot sliding turnaway.

03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

06 4100 - 4
1)
2)
No. HAWA-TURNAWAY 25/2 by Hafele America Co., Archdale, North Carolina

27263 www.hafele.com, 1-800-423-3531.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
F.
Hinges.
1. European style: Completely concealed when door closed.
a. Screw-in installation, built-in horizontal and vertical adjustment.
b. Mortised in door only.
c. Working parts steel.
d. 165-170 degree opening.
e. Free swinging.
f.
Seft-closing.
g. Meets BHMA A156.9, B01602 requirements.
h. Acceptable products.
1) Hafele America Co., Archdale, North Carolina 27263 www.hafele.com.
2) Grass America, Inc., Kennersville, North Carolina 27284 www.grassusa.com.
3) Julius Blum Inc., Stanley, North Carolina 28164 www.blum.com.
G.
Shelf clips.
1. Pin type to engage drilled holes at 1 inch increments.
2.09 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS

A.
Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated material.
B.
Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting.
2.10 SITE FINISHING MATERIALS

A.
Stain, Shellac, Varnish and Finishing Materials: As required by AWI/AWMAC Architectural

Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated.
B.
Finishing: Site finished as specified in Section 09 9100.
C.
Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials, with low/ no voc compliant with LEED
2009 New Construction.
2.11 FABRICATION
A.
Cabinet Style: Flush overlay.
B.
Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.
C.
Drawer Construction Technique: Dovetail joints.
D.
Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings.
E.
Fabricate and assemble custom casework in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, Section
400.
F.
Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than
one piece for any single length. All exposed edges of doors, drawer fronts, front and rear of
adjustable shelves, front edge of fixed shelves, and back and end splashes shall be furnished with
3 mm PVC edging. All other exposed edges shall be laminated with high pressure plastic
laminated GP 28 of the same color as the interior of the cabinet, door and drawer fronts. Cabinet
fronts shall be edged with 1 mm PVC.
G.
Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

06 4100 - 5
H.
I.
Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly
bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.
1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.
3. Plastic shall be laminated to core material under pressure with hydraulic presses and cold
setting glue.
4. Plastic laminate shall be applied to all exposed surfaces and to the rear surfaces of doors
and drawers. Balance of doors and drawers, etc., shall be finished with CL-20.
5. Balance unexposed surfaces of plastic laminate tops with 0.020 back sheet.
Matching Wood Grain: Comply with requirements of quality standard for specified Grade and as
follows:
1. Provide center matched panels at each elevation.
2. Provide sequence matching across each elevation.
3. Carry figure of cabinet fronts to toe kicks.
J.
Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center.
K.
Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions.
Prime paint cut edges, brush apply only.
L.
Countertops: work surfaces and supports - fabricate tops as indicated in the drawings and
further defined in this specification. Where supports for counter tops is not indicated in the
drawings, provide continuous uninterrupted wall cleats of the same profile and exposed surfaces
of the finish or laminate as the adjacent members. Verify with interior designer or architect if
uncertain. All exposed or semi-exposed fasteners occurring under countertops or work surfaces
to incorporate finish washer and screw fastener of appropriate type. All fasteners to be of same
type, no mix/ match of fasteners allowed on project.
1. IMPORTANT: All countertops or work surfaces to have appropriate backer or balance
sheet on the underside surface. Joints in countertops to be hairline joints, smooth and even
and accomplished by mechanical fasteners, such as the "Tite Joint" fastener system. No
attachment by lap panel and screw allowed. Fabricate tops, backsplashes and side
splashes in uninterrupted lengths using the maximum sheet or material lengths.
M. Cabinet Body and Shelves: Fabricate from 3/4 thick particle board with melamine liner finish on
semi-exposed surfaces, except where indicated as plastic laminate. Provide shelves with color
matched front and back 3mm PVC edges. All cabinets shall be doweled and glued.
N.
Cabinet Backs: Standard recessed or surface mounted cabinet back to be think pre-finished
hardboard, color to match cabinet interior. All sink cabinets to have split back, removable from
inside. Exposed exterior back of fixed or movable cabinets to be particleboard, thick
laminated with high pressure laminate GP28 on the exterior surface of a color to match the
cabinet face (unless noted otherwise) and on the interior surface with melamine.
O.
Doors: thick medium density fiberboard with plastic laminate cladding on front and back of
door, except where indicated as wood. Back side of doors and drawers shall be CL-20 cabinet
liner.
P.
Exposed bottom of wall cabinets shall have laminate finish of same material used on interior of
cabinet.
Q.
Drawer sides and backs shall be thick solid hardwood , clear and sound on two sides, of
unselected color or figure or 7-ply all hardwood veneer core plywood (no voids). Sides shall be
multiple dovetailed and glued to drawer fronts and backs. Stapling of dovetail drawer
construction shall not be permitted. Doweling of drawer construction shall be permitted provided
dowels are installed perpendicular to drawer faces.
R.
Drawer bottoms shall be 3/16 thick tempered hardboard set up approximately 5/16 from drawer
sides. Bottoms shall be grooved deep into drawer fronts, sides and backs.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

06 4100 - 6
2.12 FACTORY FINISHING

A.
Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B.
On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding
surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.
C.
Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards

Illustrated, Section 1500, Precatalyzed Lacquer, Transparent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B.
Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.
B.
Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
C.
Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and countertops.
D.
Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not
use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
E.
Secure cabinets and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
F.
Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species
to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust installed work; Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads.
B.
Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
B.
Clean and polish fabrication surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit construction near unprotected surfaces.
B.
Cover completed work with 4-mil polyethylene film protective enclosure, applied in a manner
which will allow easy removal and without damage to woodwork of adjoining work. Cover to be
remove immediately before time of final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

06 4100 - 7
SECTION 07 8413
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
2008.
B.
ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2006.
C.
UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops; 2003 (2010).
D.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

A.
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration

firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
B.
Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

through-penetration firestop systems.
C.
Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration

firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of
installations.
D.
Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed
behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by
authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
For Review.
1. Shop drawings.
a. For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction
condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating
item.
b. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each
condition indicated.
1) Submit documentation, including illustrations, from qualified testing and
inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system
configuration for construction and penetrating items.
2) Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting
agency's illustration to suit particular through-penetration firestop condition,
submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration
firestop system manufacturer's fire protection engineer.
C.
For Information.
1. Product data.
a. For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated.
2. Qualification data.
a. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience.
b. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and
addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
03243-00.000

KAHN SOUTH, INC.
07 8413 - 1
3.
Certificates.
a. Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system products certifying
that products furnished comply with requirements.
Test Reports.
a. From qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies
with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
4.

A.
Installer Qualifications.
B.
Source Limitations.
1. Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction
condition indicated, from single manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics.
1. Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with following requirements and
those specified under Part 2 article "Systems."
2. Firestopping tests are performed by qualified testing and inspecting agency.
3. Qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and
follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
4. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested in accordance with
ASTM E 814.
5. Provide rated systems complying with following requirements.
a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified
testing and inspecting agency.
b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to
through-penetration firestop system designations listed by following.
1) UL in Fire Resistance Directory.

A.
See Section 01 6000 Product Requirements, for transportation, storage, and handling
requirements.
B.
Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened

containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and
inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing
instructions for multi-component materials.
C.
Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.

A.
Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are
outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when
substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B.
Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems according to manufacturer's written instructions

by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers.
1. Dow Corporation
2. GE Silicones Construction Products
03243-00.000

KAHN SOUTH, INC.
07 8413 - 2
3.
4.
Heavy-Duty/Nelson
3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.
2.02 SYSTEMS
A.
For following constructions, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and
installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke
and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated.
1. Fire-resistance-rated load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated
openings.
2. Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated
openings.
3. Fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies.
4. Fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies.
B.
F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as

determined in accordance with ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fireresistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C.
L-Rated Systems: For penetrations in smoke barriers provide through-penetration firestop

systems with L-rating not exceeding 5 CFM per square foot at 0.30 WG at both ambient and
elevated temperatures, when tested in accordance with UL 1479.
D.
T-Rated Systems: For following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with
T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined in accordance with ASTM E 814, where
systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in
occupiable floor areas.
1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
2. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures.
3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings.
4. Penetrating items larger than 4-inch diameter nominal pipe or 16 square inches in overall
cross-sectional area.
E.
W-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems without evidence of water

leakage, when tested in accordance with UL 1479.
F.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions
both during and after construction.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moistureresistant through-penetration firestop systems.
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to
possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads
involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.
G.
For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not
requiring removal of insulation.
H.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread
ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Firestopping, General.
1. Compatibility.
a. Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another,
with substrates forming openings, and with items, if any, penetrating throughpenetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
03243-00.000

KAHN SOUTH, INC.
07 8413 - 3
2.
Accessories.
a. Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to
install fill materials and to comply with "Systems" article.
b. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer
and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems
indicated.
c. Accessories include, but are not limited to, following items.
1) Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including following.
(a) Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.
(b) Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing
materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
(c) Fire-rated form board.
(d) Fillers for sealants.
2) Temporary forming materials.
3) Substrate primers.
4) Collars.
5) Steel sleeves.
B.
Fill Materials.
1. Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing types of fill materials indicated in
Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at end of Part 3 by reference to types of
materials described in this Article.
2. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting
agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials.
C.
Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete

floors and consisting of outer metallic sleeve lined with intumescent strip, radial extended
flange attached to one end of sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and neoprene gasket.
D.
Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during
exposure to moisture.
E.
Firestop Devices (Collars): Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined
with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrate.
F.
Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric

sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.
G.
Intumescent Putties: Non-hardening dielectric, water-resistant putties not containing solvents,

inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
H.
Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum

foil on one side.
I.
Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,
fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
J.
Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled

with combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives.
K.
Silicone Foams: Multi-component, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce flexible, non-shrinking foam.
L.
Silicone Sealants: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing

elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.
M. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces
and non-sag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring non-slumping,
gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to non-sag grade for both opening
conditions.
03243-00.000

KAHN SOUTH, INC.
07 8413 - 4
N.
Wall Opening Protective Material.

1. In accordance with UL FRD, category CLIV, Wall Opening Protective Materials.
2. Proprietary composition used to maintain hourly ratings of fire resistive walls and partitions
containing flush mounted devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration

firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and
following requirements.
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials
that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems.
3. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
4. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
5. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods.
6. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed
surfaces.
7. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that
would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials.
8. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with
substrates.
3.03 MIXING
A.
For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if
required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,
and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for application indicated.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A.
Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 2 article "Systems" and firestop
system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and
applications indicated.
B.
Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support

fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes
and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
C.
After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not
indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
D.
Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce following results.
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
03243-00.000

KAHN SOUTH, INC.
07 8413 - 5
3.
E.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing work, finish to produce smooth,
uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
Wall Opening Protective Materials.

1. Install to completely cover exterior surface of outlet box except for side of outlet box
against stud at following locations.
a. At steel electrical/communication boxes on same side of wall, not more than 16
inches square, and exceeding 100 square inches for any 100 square feet.
b. At steel electrical/communication boxes on opposite sides of wall, not more than 16
inches square, not more than 100 square inches for any 100 square feet, with
horizontal distance less than 24 inches, and not back to back.

A.
Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect
through-penetration firestop systems and to prepare test reports.
B.
Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected through-penetration firestop
systems comply with or deviate from requirements.
C.
Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued.
D.
Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they
comply with requirements.
3.06 IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify through-penetration firestop systems in fire walls and/or smoke barrier walls, with
pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels.
B.
Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop
system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items
or firestop systems.
C.
Include following information on labels.

1. Text: "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building
Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
7. Hourly rating.
D.
Locate at minimum 12 feet on center, with minimum one label per wall or barrier.
3.07 CLEANING
A.
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
3.08 PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
B.
If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to
produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements.
03243-00.000

KAHN SOUTH, INC.
07 8413 - 6
3.09 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A.
UL-classified systems are indicated on through-penetration firestop systems sheet in Contract

Drawings. Alpha-alpha-numeric designations refer to those listed in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" under product Category XHEZ.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000

KAHN SOUTH, INC.
07 8413 - 7
SECTION 07 9005
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Sealants and joint backing.

A.
ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
For Information.
1. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance
criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with

minimum three years documented experience.

A.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
B.
Correct defective work within five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SYSTEM
A.
Caulking includes, but is not limited to, following.

1. Interior environment.
a. Joints around metal frames in gypsum board partitions.
b. Joints between casework/countertops and partitions.
c. Control joints.
1) In gypsum board.
2.02 SEALANTS
A.
Colors: As selected by Architect-Engineer to match adjacent surfaces.
B.
General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M
and A; single or multi- component.
1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.
a. Chem-Calk 900 (1 component) or 505 (2 component) by Bostik.
b. Dymonic by Tremco.
c. Dynatrol I-XL by Pecora.
d. Iso-Flex 830 by LymTal.
e. Sikaflex-2c NS by Sika.
03243-00.000
JOINT SEALERS
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
07 9005 - 1
f.
Sonolastic Ultra (1 component) or NP 2 (3 component) by Sonneborn.
g. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
Applications: Use for:
a. Joints between masonry and other materials.
b. Joints between metal frames and other materials.
c. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.
3.
C.
General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF
single component, paintable.
a. Acrylic Latex Calk AC-20 by Pecora.
b. Sonolac by Sonneborn.
c. Tremflex 834 by Tremco.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B.
Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; in accordance with ASTM C 1330 and
ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width; Expand-OFoam manufactured by Williams Products, Inc.; www.williamsproducts.net.
C.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit

application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B.
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.
D.
Protect elements surrounding work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of

surfaces and material installation instructions.
B.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.
C.
Use nozzle on caulking gun of proper dimension to suit size of crevice and of proper shape to
obtain neat, well finished work. Immediately clean off compound or sealant applied outside joint
lines.
D.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
F.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer

when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
G.
Tool joints slightly concave at flat surfaces and filleted at corner joints.
03243-00.000
JOINT SEALERS
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
07 9005 - 2
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
JOINT SEALERS
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
07 9005 - 3
SECTION 08 1100
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry.
B.
Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
C.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.

A.
ANSI A250.4 - American National Standard Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for
Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings; 2001.
B.
ANSI A250.6 - Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement--Application); 2003 (R2009).
C.
ANSI A250.7 - Nomenclature: Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 1997 (R2002).
D.
ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames;
2003 (R2008).
E.
ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004).
F.
ASTM A568/A568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and HighStrength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements For; 2009a.
G.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a.
H.
ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability;
2010.
I.
ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability;
2010.
J.
ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and
Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2005.
K.
ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).
L.
DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames; 2004.
M. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; 2010.

N.
SDI 113 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Apparent Thermal Performance of Steel
Door and Frame Assemblies; 2001 (R2006).
O.
UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
P.
UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 3000 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
For Review.
1. Shop drawings.
a. Steel doors.
b. Steel frames.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

08 1100 - 1
c.
Details of each opening, showing elevations, frame profiles, and identifying location
of different finishes, if any.
C.
For Information.
1. Product data.
a. Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement
type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of
referenced grade standard.
D.
Installation Instruction:
1. Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions
relating to this project.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate:
1. Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

A.
Construct doors to pass ANSI A250.4 procedure for twist test with maximum pressure of 300
pounds.
B.
Fabricate doors and frames scheduled to bear fire or temperature rating label (1/3, 3/4, 1, or 11/2 hour) in accordance with applicable requirements of National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) and attach label of accredited Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) by
Occupational Safety and Health Administration of U.S. Government (UL, ITS-WH, etc.) for class
opening designated in door schedule.
C.
NFPA requirements have precedence over other provisions of this Section.
D.
Test doors and frames in compliance with applicable requirements of NFPA 80.
E.
For fire-rated doors, temperature rise on unexposed surface may be in excess of 650 degrees
F.
F.

this section with minimum three years documented experience.
G.
Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.

A.
Refer to Section 01 6000 Product Requirements, for transportation, storage, and handling
requirements.
B.
Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
Refer to Section 01 7800 Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Steel Doors and Frames.

1. Ceco Door Products, Milan, Tennessee 37027 www.cecodoor.com.
2. Mesker Door, Inc., Huntsville, Alabama 35811 www.meskerdoor.com.
3. Steelcraft, a division of IR Security and Safety, Cincinnati, Ohio 45242
www.steelcraft.com.
4. Republic Doors and Frames, McKenzie, Tennessee 38201 www.republicdoor.com.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Steel Components.
1. For internal reinforcing, hot rolled steel sheets, commercial quality, carbon steel, in
accordance with ASTM A1011, pickled and oiled.
2. For prime painted components, cold rolled steel sheets, commercial quality, carbon steel,
in accordance with ASTM A1008 and A568.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

08 1100 - 2
3.
4.
5.
For zinc coated components, cold rolled steel sheets, commercial quality, carbon steel, in
accordance with ASTM A653, hot dipped zinc-coated, G 60 coating designation.
Free of scale, pitting or other surface defects.
Stretcher level degree of flatness.
B.
Primer in accordance with ANSI A 250.10.
C.
Mineral Wool for Steel Frames in Steel Stud Walls.

1. Unfaced, semi-rigid mineral fiber mat.
2. Fire-resistant.
3. Acceptable product.
a. Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blanket by Thermafiber, Inc.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D.
Glass: In accordance with criteria in Section 08 8000.
2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A.
Steel Door, Heavy-Duty (SD-HD).

1. Model 1: Full flush design.
2. Level 2, heavy-duty in accordance with ANSI A 250.8.
3. Face sheet thickness: Not less than 0.042 inch (18 gauge).
4. Core construction for Physical Performance Level B in accordance with ANSI A250.4.
B.
Steel Door, Heavy-Duty, Fire Rated (SD-HD-FR).

1. Model 1: Full flush design
3. Face sheet thickness: Not less than 0.042 inch (18 gauge) and in conformance with firerating requirements.
5. Meet UL-10C requirements for positive pressure opening assemblies.
6. Meet UL-1784 requirements for air leakage.
7. Label door to include fire rating, temperature rating, and smoke control.
C.
Steel Door, Heavy-Duty, Insulated (SD-HD-IN).

1. Model 1: Full flush design.
3. Face sheet thickness: Not less than 0.042 inch (18 gauge).
5. Insulation R value: Not less than 12.5 when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363 and
SDI 113.
2.04 FABRICATION
A.
Steel Doors (SD).

1. In accordance with ANSI A250.8, unless more stringent criteria are specified in this
Section.
2. Fabricate to widths and heights indicated in door schedule, less allowance for specified
clearance.
3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches unless scheduled otherwise.
4. Clearance between doors and frame.
a. At head and jamb: Not more than 1/8 inch.
b. At meeting edges of pairs of doors: Not more than 1/8 inch.
c. Referenced clearance dimensions are nominal and subject to specified
manufacturer's tolerance.
d. Design lock edges of doors for correct operating clearance.
5. Clearance between door and sill.
6. Tolerances.
a. Thickness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.
b. Width and height: Plus or minus 3/64 inch.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

08 1100 - 3
c.
d.
e.
f.
Hinge to door edge: Plus or minus 1/32 inch.

Hinge to hinge centerline: Plus or minus 1/64 inch, noncumulative.
Lock height: Plus or minus 1/32 inch.
Squareness, diagonal measurements from corner to corner: Vary not more than plus
or minus 1/16 inch.
g. Flatness, both sides of door.
1) At vertical and horizontal centerlines: Not more than plus 3/16 inch minus 0 inch
under 6-foot straightedge.
2) At vertical 1 inch from hinge edge and 1 inch from lock edge: Not more than plus
or minus 1/16 inch under 6-foot straightedge.
7. Internal construction of doors: Manufacturer's standard to comply with performance
requirements of doors.
8. Construction.
a. Full flush in accordance with Model 1, ANSI A250.8.
b. Form face sheets from one sheet of steel.
c. Locate seams on vertical door edges.
d. Close top and bottom of door with recessed channel welded in place.
9. Corrosion protection.
a. Interior: Prime painted.
b. Exterior: Zinc coated and prime painted.
10. Edge profiles on both vertical edges of doors.
a. At single-acting swing doors: Beveled, 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
11. Hardware reinforcement.
a. Reinforce doors for mortise hardware.
b. For surface mounted hardware: Weld to inner surface.
c. Minimum thicknesses for hardware reinforcing plates.
1) Hinge and pivot reinforcements: 0.1703 inch.
2) Lock face, flush bolt, concealed holder, concealed or surface mounted closer
reinforcements: 0.0994 inch.
3) Other surface mounted hardware reinforcements: 0.053 inch.
12. Hardware preparation.
a. For mortise hardware: Punch, mortise, drill and tap in accordance with templates to
be furnished by hardware supplier.
b. For surface applied hardware: Drilling and tapping will be done in field.
c. Door manufacturer shall prepare fire rated, temperature rated and smoke barrier
doors for hardware in accordance with service procedures approved by testing
laboratory (NRTL) granting labels for doors.
B.
Glass Stops.
C.
Louvers.
D.
Steel Frames (SF).

1. In accordance with ANSI A250.8, unless more stringent criteria are specified in this
Section.
2. Material for frames to receive prime paint: Commercial grade cold-rolled steel in
accordance with ASTM A1008 or commercial grade hot-rolled steel in accordance with
ASTM A1011.
3. Material for zinc coated frames: Commercial quality, carbon steel, in accordance with
ASTM A653 hot dipped, zinc coated, G 60 coating designation.
4. Corrosion protection.
a. Interior: Prime painted.
b. Exterior: Zinc coated and prime painted.
5. Metal thickness for interior locations: Not less than 0.053 inch (16 gauge) (SF-HD).
6. Metal thickness for exterior locations: Not less than 0.053 inch (16 gauge) (SF-HD).
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

08 1100 - 4
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Metal thickness for frames over 4 feet wide: Not less than 0.025 inch thicker than
thickness specified accordance with ASTM A1011.
Profiles: Sharply bent and formed to shapes shown on Contract drawings.
Stops: Not less than 5/8 inch.
Corners.
a. Diecut, mitered.
b. Continuously weld intersection of jambs and heads including rabbets and stops.
c. Grind smooth and flush with no visible joints.
d. Joints: Nonvisible.
Jamb anchors.
a. At masonry.
1) Adjustable T-strap, stirrup-and-strap, or wire type.
2) Steel sheet: Not less than 0.053 inch thick or steel wire, 0.156 inch diameter,
zinc coated.
3) Stirrup straps shall be not less than 2 inches by 10 inches in size, corrugated
and perforated.
4) One each jamb, for each 2 feet 6 inches or fraction of frame height.
b. At steel studs.
1) Wide Z-anchors designed to fit steel studs used in wall.
2) Material: Minimum 0.042 inch thick steel.
3) Length equal to stud depth, by width equal to steel face dimension less 3/8 inch,
with 1-1/2 inch flanges.
4) Securely weld inside each jamb.
5) One each jamb, for each 2 feet 6 inches or fraction of frame height.
Base anchors.
a. At each jamb.
b. Thickness: Not less than 0.042 inch.
c. Adjustable or securely welded to inside surface using shims for alignment.
d. With 2 holes for anchorage to floor.
Hardware reinforcement.
a. Steel plates: Welded in place.
b. For hinges and pivots: Not less than 0.1703 inch thick, 1-1/4 inches by 10 inches
minimum size.
c. For strikes, flush bolts, concealed or surface mounted closers: Not less than 0.0994
inch thick.
Hardware preparation.
a. For mortise hardware: Punch, mortise, drill and tap in accordance with templates
furnished by hardware supplier.
b. For surface mounted hardware: Weld reinforcement to inner surface ready for drilling
and tapping in field.
c. Frame manufacturer shall prepare fire-rated frames for hardware in accordance with
service procedures approved by the testing laboratory (NRTL) granting labels for the
frames.
Plaster guards: Weld in place.
Equip with silencers.
a. Gray molded rubber.
b. Quantity: 3 in latch jamb of single door frame.
Corrosion protection.
a. Grind, fill, and dress welds to make joints and welds invisible and provide a smooth
flush surface.
b. Chemically treat zinc-coated surfaces.
c. Thoroughly clean metal surfaces.
d. Dip or spray coat with primer after fabrication.
e. Leave surfaces smooth and ready to receive final paint finish.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

08 1100 - 5
f.
g.
Exclude final paint finish from this Section.

Do not apply any paint to rated label attached to steel components.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Steel Frames.
1. Frame fill: Fill head and jamb members with mineral wool prior to installation in metal stud
walls.
2. Frame fill at masonry or concrete walls is excluded from this Section: Refer to Section 04
2000 - Unit Masonry.
3. Set accurately in position, align, plumb, square, and brace securely with wood bracing or
metal jacks designed for purpose.
4. At door frames.
a. Use temporary wood spreaders, not less than 3/4 inch thick and cut to accurate
dimension, at mid-height and sill.
b. Remove steel spreader at floor.
c. Check frame for squareness and alignment, then secure floor anchors to floor slab
with 2 fasteners per anchor.
d. Maintain bracing until frame is permanently built into wall with anchors properly
installed.
e. Dismantle bracing and spreaders and remove from project site.
f.
Do not scratch, dent, or otherwise damage during installation.
5. Prime paint abrasions with rust-inhibiting metal primer.
B.
Steel Doors.
1. Install plumb with uniform clearance at jambs and head, and to open and close without
binding.
2. Cut, drill, and tap as required to install surface applied hardware.
3. Attach hardware accurately and securely.
4. Check Hardware Schedule to ensure that templates and details conform.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

08 1100 - 6
SECTION 08 1416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non-rated, acoustical, and special function.

A.
Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
B.
Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
C.
Section 09 2100 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
D.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coatings.

A.
B.
ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings,
Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2009.
C.
ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2006.
D.
ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated
and Uncoated Glass; 2004.
E.
ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
F.
ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2004.
G.
ASTM E 1408 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission
Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems; 1991 (Reapproved 2000).
H.
AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at

www.awiqcp.org.
I.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
J.
UL (BMD) Building Materials Directory; Underwriters laboratories Inc.; current edition.
K.
NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
For Information.
1. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
C.
For Review.
1. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts,
beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing
and other details.
a. Provide information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
b. Include certification program label.
c. Specimen warranty.
d. Test Reports: Show compliance with specified requirements for following:
1) Sound-retardant doors and frames; sealed panel tests are not acceptable.
2. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples of door veneer, 12 x 12 inches in size
illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen.
D.
Certificates.
1. Door fabrication in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
2. Acoustic-rated doors.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08 1416 - 1
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
F.
Warranty, executed in OWNER's name.

A.
Maintain one copy of specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and
finishing.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1. Company with at least one project in past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20
percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.
2. Accredited participant in specified certification program prior to commencement of
fabrication and throughout duration of project.
C.
Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality
certification of completed work.
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that work complies with requirements of AWS
Grade or Grades specified.
2. Prior to delivery to site provide shop drawings with certification labels.
3. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program.
4. Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that installation and products
meet the specified requirements.
5. Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification.
6. Replace, repair, or rework work for which certification is refused.
D.
Safety glass shall comply with governing safety glazing laws, and be permanently labeled as
required by CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201.
E.
Install Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class
as indicated.

A.
Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B.
Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or
wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with
tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
C.
Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Wood Veneer Faced Doors (WD-1):

1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.: www.algomahardwoods.com.
2. Graham Wood Doors: www.grahamdoors.com.
3. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com.
4. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com.
5. VT Industries, Inc.: www.vtindustries.com.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08 1416 - 2
2.02 DOORS
A.
All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.

1. Quality Level: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural
Woodwork Standards.
2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply; 7-ply construction is not acceptable.
3. Must be solid core wood.
B.
Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at all locations.
2. Sound Retardant Doors: Minimum STC of 45, calculated in accordance with ASTM E
413, tested in accordance with ASTM E 1408.
3. Wood veneer facing with factory finish and stain color options to match existing as
indicated in drawings. Final selection of finish to be submitted to architect for approval.
4. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with
International building Code (positive pressure); UL or WH (ITS) labeled without any
visible seals when door is open.
2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES

A.
Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and
faces as indicated above.
B.
Sound Retardant Doors: Equivalent to Type PC construction with core as required to achieve
rating specified; plies and faces as indicated above.
C.
Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core
blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting.
2.04 DOOR FACINGS

A.
Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: White birch, veneer grade as specified by quality
standard, rotary cut, book veneer match, running assembly match.
1. Vertical Edges: Same species as face veneer.
2. Provide two-ply stiles with minimum 1/4-inch solid matching lumber after presizing for door
width. Veneered edges will not be accepted
3. Pairs: Pair match each pair; set match pairs within 10 feet of each other when doors are
closed.
B.
Colors, pattern, texture, and sheen to be submitted for approval by Interior Designer.
C.
Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.
2.05 MATERIALS
A.
Safety glass.
1. Clear float: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Select (Q3).
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
3. Laminated with clear polyvinyl butyral plastic interlayer, or tempered: ASTM C 1048.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A.
Glass Lights.
1. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.
2. Cutouts: Not less than 6 inches from edge of door or other cutouts/blocking for hardware,
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Seal edges of cutouts before installing lights.
4. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for
countersink style tamper proof screws.
2.07 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A.
Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B.
Cores constructed with stiles and rails:

1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement.
2. Provide solid blocking for other through bolted hardware.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08 1416 - 3
C.
Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with
hardware requirements and dimensions.
1. Prefit and mortise for hardware.
2. Templates to be furnished by hardware supplier.
3. Door manufacturer shall design and fabricate conduit/wire path within certain wood doors
for electronic hardware.
4. Refer to door elevations on drawings.
D.
Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge
clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.
E.
Door Edge Profiles.

1. Single acting swing doors: Both vertical edges beveled, 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
2. Double acting swing doors: Both vertical edges rounded on 2-1/8 inch radius.
F.
Provide edge clearances in accordance with quality standard specified.
2.08 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS

A.
Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5

- Finishing, for Grade specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System - 5, Varnish, Conversion.
b. Stain: Color options to match existing, sample to be submitted and accepted by
Interior Designer prior to ordering.
c. Sheen: Satin.
B.
Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.
C.
Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C.
Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or
alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
1. Install plumb with uniform clearance at jambs and head, and to open and close without
binding.
B.
Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
C.
Check hardware schedule to ensure that templates and details conform. Use machine tools to
cut or drill for surface applied hardware. Attach hardware accurately and securely.
D.
Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
E.
Coordinate installation of glazing.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B.
Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B.
Adjust closers for full closure.

END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08 1416 - 4
SECTION 08 4313
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.
B.
Infill panels of glass.

A.
Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.

A.
AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; 2003 (Reaffirmed 2009).
B.
AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2004.
C.
AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for
Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009 (part of AAMA 501).
D.
AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American

Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998.
E.
ANSI H35.1/H35.1M - Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Aluminum; 2009.
F.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
G.
ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2008.
H.
ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes Metric; 2007.
I.
ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004.
J.
ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved
2010).

A.
Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise exterior enclosure.
B.
Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this
section; require attendance by affected installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
For Information.
1. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,
anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details and glass rabbet
criteria.
C.
For Review.
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and
tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details,
and field welding required.
2. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics,
engineering calculations, dimensional limitations.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
08 4313 - 1
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products supplied meet or exceed specified

requirements.
E.
Test Reports.
1. Structural evaluation.
2. Air infiltration.
3. Water infiltration.
F.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
OWNER's name and registered with manufacturer.

A.
Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct

supervision of Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed
at Alabama.
B.
Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum

glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience.

A.
Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B.
Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.

A.
Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this
minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
B.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,
including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
D.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.
Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. CMI Architectural Products, Inc.: www.cmiarch.com
2. Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com.
3. Vistawall Architectural Products: www.oldcastlebe.com.
2.02 STOREFRONT
A.
Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members

with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Glazing Position: Front-set.
2. Mullion Dimensions: Approx. 2 inches x 4 1/2 inches. MATCH EXISTING
3. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 1.57 psf.
4. Finish: Class I clear anodized.
5. Color: Clear Anodized.
B.
Performance Requirements:
1. Design and size components to withstand specified load requirements without damage or
permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times
design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
08 4313 - 2
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction,
with full recovery of glazing materials.
Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and
deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.
Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,
measured at specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM E
283.
System Internal Drainage: Drain to exterior by means of weep drainage network any
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture
occurring within system.
Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system
components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over 12 hour period
without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building
elements.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A.
Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior
section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system.
1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken.
2. Glazing stops: Flush.
3. Accept 1 inch insulated glazing.
4. Cross-Section: As indicated on drawings.
a. 450 TB by CMI Architectural Products, Inc.: www.cmiarch.com.
b. Trifab VG 451T by Kawneer Company Inc.: www.kawneer.com.
c. Series 3000-S Storefront System by Oldcastle Glass Vistawall: www.vistawall.com.
2.04 MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
B.
Fasteners: Stainless steel.
C.
Exposed Flashings:
D.
Concealed Caulking: Butyl recommended by manufacturer.
0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members.
E.
Glass: As specified in Section 08 8000.
F.
Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration
requirements.
G.
Glazing Gaskets: Neoprene or EPDM for dry seal glazing.
2.05 FINISHES
A.
Class I Clear Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A44 Electrolytically deposited colored
anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick.
B.
Color: Clear Anodized.
C.
Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.
2.06 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B.
Lay out components and space between terminals.
C.
Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
D.
Exposed work shall be free of defects.
E.
Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
08 4313 - 3
F.
Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar
metals with bituminous paint.
G.
Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
H.
Reinforce interior horizontal head rail to receive blind track brackets and attachments.
I.
Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
J.
Frames.
1. Extruded shapes in manufacturer's standard for flush dry seal glazing system.
2. Size and configuration as shown on Contract Drawings, including sidelights and transoms.
3. Furnish and install steel shapes and accessories for internal and external reinforcements,
subframes and supports.
4. Mortise and reinforce to receive finish hardware.
5. Conceal reinforcement for hardware.
6. Conceal fasteners and anchorage.
7. Weatherstrip with wool pile standard with door manufacturer.
K.
Finishing: Apply factory finish to surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that natural aluminum is not visible in
completed assemblies, including joint edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
B.
Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of
this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The manufacturer's

installation instructions shall describe step by step procedures to ensure weathertight
installation and compliance with specified criteria.
B.
Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and

other irregularities.
C.
Make allowance for different rates of expansion between aluminum frames and adjacent work
in method of fastening at time of erection.
D.
Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
E.
Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist, and at correct elevations. Maintain
assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
F.
Where joined, accurately cut and fit members for tightly closed joints.
G.
Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
H.
Insulate surfaces of aluminum coming in direct contact with dissimilar materials with heavy
shop coat of alkali resistant bituminous paint, zinc-chromate paint, or similar suitable coating.
I.
Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.
J.
Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads
to sill flashing.
K.
Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
L.
Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of

thermal barrier.
M. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 8000, using glazing method
required to achieve performance criteria.
N.
Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
08 4313 - 4
3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10
ft, whichever is less.
B.
Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.

A.
See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection
requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing.
B.
Test installed storefront for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B.
Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C.
Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.

END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
08 4313 - 5
SECTION 08 7100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Hardware for wood doors.
B.
Hardware for fire-rated doors.
C.
Electrically operated and controlled hardware.
D.
Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections.
E.
Thresholds.
F.
Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.

A.
Section 08 1100 - Steel Doors and Frames.
B.
Section 08 1400 - Flush Wood Doors.

A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.
B.
DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004.
C.
DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors;
Door and Hardware Institute; 1996.
D.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association;
2007.
E.
NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire
Protection Association; 2006.
F.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

A.
Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware
will be installed.
B.
Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers.
C.
Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting one week prior to commencing

work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
D.
General Standards.
1. ANSI A156.1
Butts & Hinges
2. ANSI A156.3
Exit Devices
3. ASNI A156.4
Door Closers
4. ASNI A156.6
Door Trim
5. ANSI A156.13
Mortise Locks/Latches
6. ANSI A156.21
Thresholds
7. ADA
Public Law - 1992
8. All prevailing City, County State and other applicable Codes.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 1
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Hardware Schedule.
1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and delivered under this
Section.
a. Identify each item by manufacturer, catalog number and location in the work, using
door designation shown on drawings.
b. Make schedule in vertical format to facilitate checking by Architect. Furnish a
minimum of five (5) sets of this Schedule.
c. Architect's approval of hardware schedule shall not relieve Contractor of the
responsibility to furnish necessary hardware.
C.
Manufacturer's Product Data: Indicating full compliance with requirements of this Section.
1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, catalog
cuts..
2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and other required submittal data. Provide a
minimum of five (5) sets of submittal data.
3. Substitutions: Substitutions WILL NOT be accepted after bidding of the project. Refer to
Section 01 6000 for substitution requirements and the time required for submittal for
substitutions.
D.
Samples: Prior to preparation of hardware schedule:

1. Submit 1 sample of hinge, latch set, lockset, closer, and other hardware illustrating style,
color, and finish.
2. Samples will be returned to supplier and may be included in the work.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions

requiring special attention, and templates. For items requiring special field preparation, submit
five (5) copies.
F.
Templates: After hardware schedule is approved, deliver hardware templates or physical

samples to pertinent suppliers of interfacing items such as doors and frames.
G.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and
conduit.
H.
Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and

inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
1. Tools for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools as needed for Owner's
continued adjustment, maintenance and removal and replacement of builders hardware.
I.
Keys: All keys and permanent cylinders are furnished by the owner.
J.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

A.
Standards for Fire-Rated Doors: Maintain one copy of each referenced standard on site, for use
by Architect and Contractor.
1. Provide hardware for the fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA standard No. 80.
Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of
doors required and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels.
Furnish door closers, ball bearing hinges and positive latch/lock on all UL doors.
2. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire rated doors (with supplementary
marking on door UL label indicating "Fire door to be equipped with fire exit hardware"),
provide UL label on exit device indicating "Fire exit hardware".
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 2
B.

this section with minimum five years of documented experience.
C.
Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door

hardware with 10 years of experience.
1. This firm shall employ at least one full time qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant
(AHC) who is a current member of the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) of Chantilly,
Virginia, available to the Architect and General Contractor for consultation as required to
complete the work.
2. All submittals must bear signature of an AHC.
D.
The General contractor shall retain the services of the factory representative of each hardware
component selected and, through the representative, certify that all hardware is installed and
operating per manufacturer's requirements.
E.
For the purpose of designating the minimum aesthetic, functional and quality standards for the
work of this section, proprietary products are specified.
F.
Substitutions.
1. Products of manufacturers listed in this Section are acceptable only after compliance with
the requirements of this Section.
2. Products of manufacturers not listed in this section are acceptable for evaluation only after
compliance with substitution requirements.
1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A.
Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. This meeting is to be attended by
the Owner, the Architect, the AHC, and the manufacturer's hardware representative. The
purpose of the meeting is to clarify time for certification and inspections and acceptable quality
levels expected at Substantial Completion. Owner to clarify keying requirements.

A.
Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to
match hardware schedule. Individually package each unit of finish hardware, complete with
proper fastenings and appertunances, clearly marked on the outside to indicate the contents
and specific locations in the work. The hardware supplier shall meet at the jobsite with the
installer prior to commencing installation of hardware for explanation of packing, labeling and
hardware schedule data, if required.
B.
Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect and Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.09 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of
internal reinforcement for door hardware.
B.
Furnish templates for door and frame preparation.
C.
Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
D.
Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the work.
1.10 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide 10 year warranty for door closers and one (1) year on all other items.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 3
1.11 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A.
Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.
B.
Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HARDWARE
A.
B.
Finish: Finishes are to be as follows:

1. Hinges
2. Exit Devices/ Push/Pulls Plates
3. Closers
4. Thresholds
5. Locks
6. Kickplates
US26D
US26D
Sprayed Aluminum
Aluminum
US32D
US32D
HARDWARE SETS.
1. The following hardware sets are listed as a guide to requirements. Locksets, closers and
other critical items of hardware are scheduled by model number to establish operating
characteristics. It shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier to provide additional
hardware in accordance with this Section for proper function of the door(s).
2. Refer to the door schedule, included in the drawings, for reference to the hardware set
required for each door. The full intent of this specification shall apply. Substitution
restrictions shall be strictly adhered to.
3. Manufacturer's listed in the hardware schedule are as follows:
a. Locksets
Best
b. Door stops
Rockwood
c. Closers
LCN
d. Push/Pulls
Rockwood
e. Door Release/OH Holders
Rixson
f.
Panic Devices
Von Duprin
g. Electric Strikes
HES
h. Electronic Accessories
Securitron
i.
Hinges
Hager
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Hinges: Butt hinges are to be by McKinney, Stanley or Hager. Provide three 4-1/2 inches by 41/2 inches hinges for each door up to 7 feet 0 inches high. Provide one extra hinge for each
additional 18 inches or part thereof over 7 feet high. All doors are 1-3/4 inches thick.
1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com.
3. Stanley Hardware: www.stanleyworks.com.
4. Continuous gear hinges shall be manufactured of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy/
temper.
5. All hinges shall be manufactured to template screw locations and be non-handed.
6. Thrust bearings shall carry the vertical loads and be completely concealed by the gear cap
the full length of the hinge.
7. All mortise hinges shall cover and wrap the edge of door completely.
8. All hinges shall be tested by a certified independent testing laboratory to 1,500,000 cycles
and certified functional, ANSI 156.1.
9. Bearings are not to be installed in hinges before electro-plating the hinge. If frozen
bearings are found, general contractor will be required to replace the complete shipment.
B.
Lock and Latch Sets.

1. Acceptable manufactures: Best No Substitutions, match existing.
2. Lever trim shall have solid levers; no filled or Hollow Levers will be accepted.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 4
3.
The contractor will provide all permanent cylinders for the locksets. The contractor must
test cylinders in the hardware to verify that the lockset is functioning properly.
4. No plastic parts in locksets are allowed.
5. All hardware must accept Best cores and be in Best cylinders.
6. During the design phase the designer shall consult with the Facilities Division - Access
Control Department to discuss the specific requirements for card access and locks with
regard to each project.
7. Mortise type locks and latches shall be heavy-duty with 3/4 inch throw latch bolt.
8. Deadbolt functions shall be 1 inch projections made of hardened stainless steel.
9. Both deadbolt and latch bolt are to extend into the case a minimum of 3/8 inch when fully
extended.
10. Furnish locksets and latch sets with sufficient curved strike lip to protect door trim.
11. Provide locksets with Best 7-pin interchangeable core cylinders. All mortise cylinders shall
have a concealed internal set screw for securing the cylinder to the body.
12. All mortise locksets must conform to ANSI A156.13, series 1000 operational Grade 1 and
be listed by UL. Locksets must fit ANSI A115.1 door preparation.
13. Locks and latches to have self-aligning, thru-bolted trim.
14. Auxiliary dead latch to be made of one piece stainless steel permanently lubricated.
15. Levers handles must be forged or cast brass, bronze, or stainless steel construction and
conform to ANSI A117.1.
16. Spindle to be such that it will twist first then break, thus preventing forced entry.
17. Levers to be operated with a roller bearing spindle hub mechanism.
18. Heavy duty mortise locksets with dead latches are preferred. Inside trim shall include a
turn lever to permit egress when door is locked.
C. Exit Devices
1. Electrified exit devices will be Von Duprin, EL RX 98 Series, Electric Latch Retraction, and
Request to exit (RQE).
2. All exterior doors to be electrified and monitored by the BASIS system and software. Refer
to owners Facility Standards.
3. All electrified doors to be installed as night function, so no manual locking is required after
hours.
4. All lock hardware must accept BEST Access System, 7 pin, interchangeable cores.
Submit lock options to Architect for approval.
5. At least one exterior door will have a BASIS< BAS-2010 card reader.
6. Provide delayed egress function where indicated.
7. The owner will provide all permanent cylinders for the exit devices. The contractor must
test cylinders in the hardware to verify that the lockset is functioning properly.
8. If ADA operator is used on any card access door, the door will have both a swipe reader
and proximity reader to be tied into BASIS.
D.
Push/Pulls.
1. Assa Abloy Rockwood
www.rockwoodmfg.com
E.
Closers.
1. Exterior Closers. LCN 4041 Series (No Substitutions Allowed).
2. Interior Closers. LCN 1461 Series (No Substitutions Allowed).
a. All closers must be barrier free.
b. All closers must have ten (10) year warranty.
c. Furnish heavy duty arms "CLP", where noted herein.
d. Furnish drop brackets if required.
e. Furnish parallel arms on out-swinging doors.
f.
All closers to be furnished with TBWMS screws.
g. All closers will be mounted on interior side of room.
h. All closers will be equipped with delayed action feature.
F.
Door Stops: Acceptable manufacturers are Rockwood, Glynn Johnson, Trimco

1. Provide wall mounted stops similar to WS01.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 5
2.
3.
4.
5.
Floor Stops similar to McKinney FS01.

Where swing of a door interferes with another door, provide roller bumpers similar to
Rockwood 455 or 456 as required to suit conditions.
Furnish door stops for all door leaves.
Furnish overhead (oh) holders/stops Rixson 9/10 adjustable series where wall bumpers are
not sufficient.
G.
Rubber Silencers Provide three (3) per single door and one per leaf of double doors.
H.
Astragals. Shall be 600A by NGP or equal by Pemko
I.
Coordinators, Carry Bars and Strikes: Provide coordinators, carry bars and strikes on pairs of
doors which have automatic closers and astragals.
J.
Overhead Holders: Shall be Rixson 9/10 Series or Glynn Johnson, ABH.
K.
Manual and Automatic Bolts/ Coordinators.

1. Flush Bolts
555/557
2. Auto Bolts
1800/1900
3. Coordinator
1600 Series
4. DP Strike
570
5. Where through-bolts are used to attach hardware to metal doors, spacer sleeves in doors
shall be provided to prevent collapse of the door.
6. Thru-bolt fasteners shall be templated so as not to make contact with the frame assembly.
L.
Thresholds, Weatherstripping, Lightproofing.

1. Threshold
2. Sweep
3. Weatherstrip
4. Drip Cap
Pemko or NGP.
896V
101VA
5050
16A@ doors without overhang
M. Protection Plates.
1. Rockwood, McKinney or Trimco
2. Plates shall be .050 thickness.
a. Kickplates shall be 10 inches by 2 LDW.
b. Mop Plates shall be 6 inches by 1 LDW and stainless steel or brass in .050
thickness
c. Screws are to be furnished to match protection plate finish.
2.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS
A.
Provide products that comply with the following.

1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State, and local codes.
2. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities.
3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.
4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.
5. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
B.
Finishes: Identified in schedule See 2.01 above.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
B.
Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct
characteristics.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 6
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
B.
Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C.
Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.
D.
Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item.
1. For steel frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware
for Steel Doors and Frames."
2. For wood doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware
for Wood Flush Doors."
3. Wood doors: See Section 08211.
E.
Install each hardware item on compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface
protections with finishing work specified in Division 9 Specifications. Do not install surfacemounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.
1. Door closer shall be mounted and adjusted to meet "ADA" barrier free requirements.
F.
Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
G.
Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

A.
Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware
and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and as specified.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
C.
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or
function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly
as intended for the application made.
D.
Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy of a space or areas, return to the work during the week prior to
acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such
space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of the
hardware and doors.
E.
Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware
finish during the final adjustment of hardware. A properly identified binder is required at project
closeout including all templates, installation instructions, as built, special details and special
tools are to be turned over to owner. Refer to owners facility standards.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 7
C.
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or
function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly
as intended for the application made.
D.
Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware
finish during the final adjustment of hardware.
3.06 SCHEDULE - Refer to drawings for Hardware Specification Sets.

END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 8
SECTION 08 8000
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Section 08 1100 Metal Doors and Frames
B.
Section 08 4313 Aluminum-framed Storefronts

A.
ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings,
Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2009.
B.
ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005.
C.
ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2006.
D.
ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009.
E.
ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass
Units; 2001.
F.
ASTM E 1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings;
2009a.
G.
ASTM E 2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;
2008.
H.
GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2008.
I.
GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; 2008.
J.
ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2009.

A.
Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this Section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
For Review.
1. Samples for verification: Submit two samples of glass units.
2. Certification of design criteria included in design of glazing signed and sealed by Design
Professional.
C.
For Information.
1. Product data.
a. Glass types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size
limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
b. Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available
colors.
2. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that sealed insulating glass meets or exceeds
specified requirements.

A.
Qualifications.
1. Design Professional (Specialty Structural Engineer).
a. Accepts responsibility for design of glazing in accordance with Contract Documents.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
GLAZING
08 8000 - 1
B.
Perform work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing
installation methods.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum
three years documented experience.

A.
Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
B.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ASSEMBLIES
A.
Design Criteria.
1. Design, fabricate, and install glazing in accordance with requirements of International
Building Code. When these standards conflict with other codes or standards, more
restrictive requirements shall apply.
B.
Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air
barrier.
1. To utilize inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for continuity of air barrier and vapor
retarder seal.
2. To maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout glazed assembly from
glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.
C.
Glass types and appearance to match throughout project as follows.

1. Glass, clear; from one of specified manufacturers, but not necessarily from same
manufacturer.
D.
Silicone Sealant.
1. Adhere to metal and glass with adhesion strength equal or exceeding manufacturer's
published value.
2. Compatible with gaskets, spacers, and setting blocks after 21 days exposure to ultraviolet
radiation of 2000 to 4000 Microwatts.
3. Design stress of 20 pounds per square inch using 6 to 1 safety factor.
2.02 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS

A.
Manufacturers.
1. AGC Flat Glass North America: www.na.agc-flatglass.com.
2. Guardian Industries Corp.: www.guardian.com.
3. Oldcastle Glass: www.oldcastle.com.
4. Pilkington North America Inc.: www.pilkington.com.
5. PPG Industries, Inc.: www.ppg.com.
6. Viracon, Inc.: www.viracon.com.
7. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
B.
Clear Float Glass, Safety (Type GL-CS): Clear, fully tempered or laminated.
1. Comply with ASTM C 1048, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
select).
2. Laminated with 0.015 inch thick plastic interlayer; comply with ASTM C 1172.
3. Comply with ANSI Z97.1.
4. 6 mm minimum thick.
5. Cut edges.
6. Color: Match Existing
7. Cut edges.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
GLAZING
08 8000 - 2
C.
Wireless Fire-Rated Glass, Safety (Type GL-FCS).

1. Appearance: Clear.
2. Thickness in accordance with indicated fire-resistance ratings.
3. Cut edges.
4. Listed in Building Materials Directory published by Underwriters Laboratories for fire-rated
openings.
5. Withstand positive pressure test with hose stream.
6. Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and 16CFR1201 Category II.
a. Pyrobel by InterEdge Technologies: www.firesafe-glass.com.
b. Super Lite II-XL by Safety and Fire Technology International: www.safti.com.
c. SGG Keralite FR-L by Vetrotech Saint-Gobain Glass: www.vetrotechusa.com.
2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS

A.
Manufacturers.
1. Dow Corning Corp: www.dowcorning.com.
2. GE Plastics: www.geplastics.com.
3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A.
Manufacturers.
1. Pecora Corporation; www.pecora.com.
2. Saint-Gobain Performance Plastics; www.plastics.saint-gobain.com.
3. Tremco, Inc.; www.tremcosealants.com.
4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.

Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet
space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
C.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.

Minimum 3 inch long x one half of height of glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self
adhesive on one face.
D.
Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15
Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.
E.
Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

A.
Provide shop inspection and testing for sealed insulating glass.
B.
Test samples in accordance with ANSI Z97.1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement; weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
D.
Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.
E.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
GLAZING
08 8000 - 3
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A.
Install glass with bite equal to or exceeding glass manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Install glass with sufficient perimeter and lateral clearance to avoid contact with frame.
C.
In aluminum window, curtain wall, and door frames that are clean and dry, secure glass using
glazing system furnished by frame manufacturer.
D.
In wood and steel doors and borrowed lites, set glass with glazing tape.
E.
Remove and reinstall glass stops.
3.04 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT)

A.
Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sight line. Seal
corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant.
B.
Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full
perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal.
C.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
D.
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient
pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit.
E.
Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, 1/4 inch
below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with tape flush with sight line.
F.
Fill gap between glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, but
not more than 3/8 inch below sight line.
G.
Apply cap bead of sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line, flush
with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after Work is complete.
C.
Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark
heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
GLAZING
08 8000 - 4
SECTION 09 2116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Gypsum sheathing.

A.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
B.
ASTM C 473 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products; 2010.
C.
ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007).
D.
ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2009a.
E.
ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006.
F.
ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2009a.
G.
ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010.
H.
ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2008.
I.
ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2002.
J.
ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application
of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007.
K.
ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2009a.
L.
ASTM D 1037 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fiber and
Particle Panel Materials; 2006a.
M. ASTM D 2394 - Standard Methods for Simulated Service Testing of Wood and Wood-Base Finish
Flooring; 2005 e1.
N.
ASTM D 4977 - Standard Test Method for Granule Adhesion to Mineral Surfaced Roofing by
Abrasion; 2003 (Reapproved 2009).
O.
ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
P.
Q.
GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2010.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
For Review.
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with acoustic seals.
C.
For Information.
1. Product Data.
a. Provide data on steel framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system.
b. Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing
compliance with requirements.

A.
Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840.

1. Maintain one copy of standards at project site.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

09 2116 - 1
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with

minimum 3 years of documented experience.
C.
Manufacturer's letters of conformance certifying that components to be used on project conform

to specified requirements.
1. Sound-rated partitions.
D.
Manufacturer's letters of conformance certifying gypsum board components to be used on

project are manufactured in their totality in the continental United States. Materials manufactured
outside the continental United States are not acceptable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Gypsum Board:
1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
2. G-P Gypsum Corporation: www.gp.com.
3. Lafarge North America: www.lafargenorthamerica.com.
4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.
5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.
B.
Steel Framing, Connectors and Accessories:

1. ClarkWestern Building Systems: www.clarkwestern.com.
2. Dietrich Metal Framing, Inc.: www.dietrichindustries.com.
3. Marino-Ware: www.marinoware.com.
4. The Steel Network Inc.: www.SteelNetwork.com.
2.02 ASSEMBLIES
A.
Steel Framing: Design and install in accordance with ASTM C 475 and International Building
Code.
B.
Gypsum Board: Install in accordance with ASTM C 754 and International Building Code.
C.
When codes and standards are in conflict, more stringent requirements shall govern.
D.
Acoustic Attenuation for Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: STC as indicated on drawings,
calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM
E 90.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Steel Framing
1. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of
size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for spacing indicated, with
maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. For framing supporting
abuse-resistant board, select framing size and properties to comply with ASTM C 1629 for
level of abuse resistance specified below.
a. Studs: C shaped with knurled faces.
b. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
c. Ceiling Channels: C shaped.
d. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.
2. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C 754 for spacing required.
3. Partition Head To Structure Connections (non-fire rated): Provide track fastened to
structure with legs of sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut
short and fastened as indicated on drawings.
4. Fasteners to concrete
a. At floor: Accepted stub nails or 3/16 inch Buildex Tapcon anchors.
b. At overhead construction: Tapcon anchors.
5. Fasteners to steel
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

09 2116 - 2
a.
At steel framing, ceilings, and similar overhead construction: 3/16 inch bolts, toggle
bolts, or No. 12 screws as required by conditions.
B.
Gypsum Board Regular.

1. General
a. In accordance with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
b. Manufactured Location: Continental United States.
c. Lengths: To minimize joints in place.
d. Ends: Square cut.
2. Regular (GBR-R).
a. Core: Regular.
b. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
c. Edges: Tapered.
3. Moisture-Resistant (GBR-M).
a. Core: Treated to withstand effects of moisture and high humidity.
b. Facing: Light green and treated to withstand effects of moisture and high humidity.
c. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
d. Edges: Tapered.
4. Interior Ceiling (GBR-I).
a. Core: Formulated for sag resistance in accordance with ASTM C 473 equal to 5/8
inch board.
b. Thickness: 1/2 inch
c. Edges: Tapered.
5. Flexible (GBR-F).
a. Bending radii lengthwise:
1) At inside concave dry: 32 inches with studs at not more than 9 inches on
centers.
2) At inside concave wet: 20 inches with studs at not more than 9 inches on
centers.
b. Thickness: 2 layers of 1/4 inch boards.
c. Edges: Tapered.
C.
Gypsum Board Fire Rated.

1. General
a. In accordance with ASTM C 1396/C1396M.
b. Manufactured Location: Continental United States.
c. Rating: By Underwriters Laboratories or Warnock Hersey.
d. Lengths: To minimize joints in place.
e. Ends: Square cut.
2. Regular (GBF-R)
a. Core: Type X or G as required for fire-rating.
b. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
c. Edges: Tapered.
D.
Acoustic Insulation (sound attenuation blanket - SAB).

1. In accordance with ASTM C 665.
2. Material: Preformed glass fiber or mineral wool.
3. Type: Unfaced, friction fit.
4. At non-fire-rated partitions extending above ceiling line.
a. Thickness: 2-1/2 inches to meet sound rating requirements.
5. At partitions to underside of ceiling.
a. Thickness: 2-1/2 inches.
E.
Acoustic Sealant.
2. Non-hardening, permanently flexible.
3. Gun or spray grade.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

09 2116 - 3
4.
a. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919: Harleysville, Pennsylvania 19438 www.pecora.com .
b. Tremco, Inc.; TREMstop Smoke & Sound Sealant: Cleveland, Ohio 44104
www.tremcosealants.com.
c. United States Gypsum Company; Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant: Chicago, Illinois
60680 www.usg.com.
F.
Smoke Control Sealant.

2. Acrylic latex.
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20: Harleysville, Pennsylvania 19438 www.pecora.com .
b. Tremco, Inc.; TREMstop Smoke & Sound Sealant: Cleveland, Ohio 44104
www.tremcosealants.com.
c. Sonneborn a division of BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Sonolac: Shakopee,
Minnesota 55379 www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
G.
Corner Beads: Galvanized steel with perforated flanges, CB bead, as defined in ASTM C 840.
H.
Edge Trim: Bead type(s) as detailed.
I.
Control Joints: Galvanized steel.
J.
Reveal Trim.
1. Aluminum chromate conversion finish.
2. Profile: As indicated.
a. Fry Reglet Corporation; Drywall Reveal Moulding: Norcross, Georgia 30071
www.fryreglet.com.
b. Gordon, Inc., Shreveport, Louisiana 71134 www.gordongrid.com.
c. MM System Corporation; Duratrim Channel Reveal: Tucker, Georgia 30085
www.mmsystemscorp.com.
d. Pittcon Industries; SWR Series: Phoenix, Arizona 85034 www.pittconindustries.com.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
K.
Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project
conditions.
L.
Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations.
M. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to
suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A.
General.
1. Erect plumb and true, without waves or buckles, and rigid.
2. Securely fasten members together and to structural supports.
3. Do not support framing from metal roof deck, air ducts, or piping.
4. Comply with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members not more than 16 inches
on center.
1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.
2. Laterally brace entire suspension system.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

09 2116 - 4
C.
Steel Studs
1. Spacing: 16 inches on centers.
2. Extend partition framing to structure above where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.
Anchor to structure above.
3. Use maximum length studs.
4. Install studs vertically in runs of partitions and at partition intersections, partition terminals,
and intersections with structural members and walls.
5. Position studs with open side facing in same direction and punch-outs aligned.
6. At framed openings, partition intersections and corners, securely fasten studs to floor
runners with screws or similar accepted method.
7. At adjacent vertical metal, concrete, and masonry construction, adhere gasket material to
stud and set to compress gasket material approximately 25 percent.
8. Runners: Attach at each end and at not more than 24 inches on centers.
9. Do not terminate partitions at ceiling grid without prior approval by owner and architect: If
approval is provided, trim top edge of gypsum board partition with ceiling system L trim in
white finish.
10. Partitions Terminating at Structure (non-fire rated): Attach extended leg top runner to
structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of
studs with continuous bridging.
11. Partitions Terminating 4 inches above Ceiling: Extend framing as specified for partitions
extending to underside of construction above.
12. Partitions Terminating at Underside of Gypsum Board Ceiling.
a. Adhere gasket material to top side of ceiling runner.
b. Attach ceiling runner through gypsum board at 24 inches on center using hollow wall
screw anchors.
D.
At door and similar framed openings.

1. At jambs.
a. Use 1-piece full height double studs.
b. Screw or bolt together at 24 inch centers.
c. Use not less than 0.031 inch thick (20 gauge) components.
d. Screw attach jamb studs to frame anchors installed on frames.
2. At head.
a. Form head runner from runner channel 6 inches longer than frame.
b. Slit flanges and bend web to allow flanges to overlap vertical jamb studs.
c. Anchor head runner flanges to vertical jamb studs.
d. Attach 6 inch length of stud perpendicular at each end.
e. Securely attach length of stud to jamb studs.
f.
At center of door but not less than 16 inches on center, attach cripple studs extending
from head runner to top of partition.
E.
Chase partition framing.

1. Space floor runner parallel to adjacent partition to form chase and attach.
2. Position studs in runners vertically spaced to align with studs of adjacent partition and with
flanges in same orientation.
3. Anchor studs to floor runner flanges.
4. Cross brace between rows of studs.
a. Use not less than 2-1/2 inch studs.
b. Space at top and at not more than 48 inches on center.
c. Anchor web at each end of brace to stud web with 2 panhead screws.
d. If chase partition studs are not opposite, install horizontal stud between studs to
receive cross brace.
5. Option, anchor ceiling runner to deck above and use full height studs.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

09 2116 - 5
F.
Curved partition framing.

1. Cut 1 leg and web of top and bottom runner at 2 inch intervals for length of arc, allowing 12
inches of uncut runner at each end.
2. Bend runners to uniform curve of required radius.
3. Support cut leg of runner by clinching a 1 inch by 22 gauge steel strip to inside of leg.
4. Attach runners to structural elements at floor and ceiling.
5. Position studs vertically with open side facing in same direction and engaging floor and
ceiling runners.
6. Space studs equally at:
a. 6 inches on centers for arcs between 2 feet and 3 feet.
b. 8 inches on centers for arcs between 3 feet and 4 feet.
c. 12 inches on centers for arcs between 4 and 5 feet.
7. Begin and end arc with 2 studs at 6 inches on centers at tangents.
8. Secure studs to runners.
G.
Control joints.
1. Frame for partition and ceiling control joints.
2. Locate in accordance with ASTM C 840.
3. Install framing members on each side of control joint to allow independent movement.
H.
Conventional soffit framing.

1. Attach runner at 24 inches on center to overhead concrete with expansion or adhesive
anchors and to suspended ceilings with toggle or molly bolts.
2. Locate fasteners close to outside face runner.
3. Attach sidewall runner to stud partitions with screw fasteners to engage each stud and to
concrete and masonry with expansion or adhesive anchors at 24 inches on center.
4. Fasten vertical gypsum board panel to face web of corner runner and flange of ceiling
runner with 1 inch screws spaced 12 inches on center located not less than 1 inch from edge
of gypsum.
5. Reinforce vertical gypsum board panels with depth over 2 feet using vertical studs attached
to ceiling runner and corner runner.
6. For spans up to 6 feet, between corner runner and sidewall runner, insert 2-1/2 inch studs
and attach to runners.
7. Attach horizontal gypsum board panel to studs and runners with 1 inch screws spaced 12
inches on center.
I.
Conventional ceiling framing.

1. Space carrying channels at 42 inches on center, beginning and ending within 6 inches of
partitions but not penetrating or touching abutting partitions.
2. Suspend carrying channels from construction above with hanger wires spaced 48 inches on
center.
3. Cross-fur carrying channels with furring channels at 16 inches on center and within 6 inches
of partitions.
4. Securely clip or saddle tie furring channels with 2 strands of 18 gauge wire to carrying
channels.
5. End splice furring channels by nesting 8 inches and secure with wire.
6. Furnish 1 inch clearance between furring ends and abutting partitions and partitions.
7. Furnish proper support for gypsum board at partitions which penetrate ceiling plane.
8. Frame or fur vertical surfaces between different ceiling levels to furnish proper support for
gypsum board.
9. Install additional cross reinforcing to maintain lateral stability at light troffers and openings
that interrupt carrying or furring channels.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

09 2116 - 6
J.
Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more
than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate
channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.
1. Orientation: Horizontal.
2. Spacing: At 16 inches on center.
K.
Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures. Comply with Section 06 1000 for
wood blocking. Provide wood blocking as necessary for partition stability.
3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A.
Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
B.
Acoustic Insulation (sound attenuation blankets - SAB).

1. In accordance with GA 600.
2. In non-fire-rated partitions: Install between partition studs.
3. In fire-rated partitions: Install mineral fiber batts to completely fill stud cavity.
4. Install immediately ahead of gypsum board and after one side is complete.
5. Attach to gypsum board with five 9/16 inch staples driven through each blanket, one in
center and others spaced 3 inches from each corner.
6. Butt ends of blankets closely and fill voids.
7. At partitions to underside of ceiling.
a. Install sound attenuation blanket over top of ceiling.
b. Extend 2 feet on both sides of partition.
c. Lay blankets tight for continuous fit.
C.
Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing
members.
2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.
3. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations including but not limited to
conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes.
3.04 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION

A.
Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end
joints, especially in highly visible locations. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings as terminating at finished ceiling, or 4 inches above

finished ceiling, extend partitions to overhead construction and face with board on both sides of
studs.
C.
Cut to fit neatly around outlets and switch boxes.
D.
Carefully scribe to perimeter construction.
E.
Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and
edges occurring over firm bearing.
1.
Gypsum board shall not touch the floor. Clearance shall be no greater than inch.
F.
Gypsum Soffit Board: Install perpendicular to supports, with staggered end joints over supports.
G.
Soffit Construction.
1. Install gypsum board with long dimension at right angles to furring channels.
2. Fasten with screws spaced 12 inches on center in field along abutting edges.
3. Position abutting end joints over web surface of furring channel and fit neatly and accurately
with end joints staggered.
4. Support board around cutouts and openings.
H.
Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board.
I.
Curved Surfaces: Apply gypsum board to curved substrates in accordance with GA-216.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

09 2116 - 7
J.
Curved Partitions:
1. Moisten board by applying clean water to entire face and back surfaces.
2. Stack board on flat surface and let stand for at least 1 hour.
3. Apply board to curved surface.
4. Fasten starting edge.
5. Gradually push board tightly against framing and then fasten.
6. Start from fixed end to free end.
7. Screw to studs in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 840.
8. Use multiple layers of thinner board to achieve required radius and material thickness.
K.
Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and tile
backer board with sealant.
L.
Ceiling construction.
1. Install gypsum board with long dimension at right angles to furring channels.
2. Fasten with screws spaced 12 inches on center in field and along abutting edges.
3. Position abutting end joints over web surface of furring channel and fit neatly and accurately
with end joints staggered.
4. Support board around cutouts and openings.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A.
Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.
1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long.
2. At other locations: As indicated on Drawings.
B.
Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
C.
Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.
D.
Smoke Control Sealant.

1. Install to seal against passage of smoke.
a. At floors, walls, and overhead joints.
b. At cutouts for mechanical and electrical outlets.
c. At similar smoke leakage points.
E.
Reveal Trim.
1. Install in as long lengths as possible.
2. Carefully align butt joints.
3. Accurately miter inside and outside corners.
4. Tape and treat flanges with filling treatment.
3.06 JOINT TREATMENT

A.
Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840 and
as scheduled below.
B.
Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board.
3.07 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet
in any direction.
3.08 FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE

A.
In accordance with GA -214.
B.
Finishing.
1. Smooth tool marks and ridges by lightly sanding or wiping joint compound with a dampened
sponge.
2. Exercise care to ensure that nap of gypsum board facing paper is not raised during sanding
operations.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

09 2116 - 8
C.
Level 4.
1. Embed tape in joint compound at joints and interior angles.
2. Apply 3 separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and
accessories.
3. Remove excess joint compound from surfaces.
4. Smooth joint compound free of tool marks and ridges.
5. Locations.
a. Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive flat or eggshell paint finish.
D.
Level 5 all high traffic areas.

1. Embed tape in joint compound at joints and interior angles.
2. Apply 3 separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and
accessories.
3. Remove excess joint compound from surfaces.
4. Apply thin skim coat of joint compound or material manufactured especially for this purpose
to entire surface.
a. Smooth skim coat free of tool marks and ridges.
5. Locations.
a. Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

09 2116 - 9
SECTION 09 5113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Section 01 4100 - Regulatory Requirements - Seismic Control.

A.
ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural, HighStrength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
B.
ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
C.
ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
Process.
D.
ASTM C 423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients
by the Reverberation Room Method; 2007a.
E.
ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2007.
F.
ASTM C 636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2008.
G.
ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
H.
2010.
I.
ASTM E 119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Material.
J.
K.
ASTM E 795 - Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption
Tests; 2005.
L.
ASTM E 1111 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceilings
Systems.
M. ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008.

N.
ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing
a Common Ceiling Plenum.
O.
ASTM E 1477 Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical Materials
by Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers.
P.
FEDERAL SPEC SS-S-118B current edition.
Q.
CISCA (AC) - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice; 1999.
R.
NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films; 2004.
S.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.
T.
ASHRAE standard 62.1-2004, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A.
Suspension Systems - General

1. In accordance with requirements of ASTM C 635 with the following medications.
a. Section 7.1: When items not meeting Specifications are discovered, items shall be
marked and removed from site immediately.
b. Section 13.2: Contractor shall be responsible to see that applied ceiling loads do not
exceed load recommendations published by suspension systems manufacturer.
c. Install hangers and framing necessary to reduce spans and applied loads to
recommendations.
03243-00.000

KAHN SOUTH, INC.
09 5113 - 1
2.
3.
4.
Maximum deflection of a spanning component shall not exceed span/360.

Duty Rating of suspension system shall be classified in compliance with ASTM C 635.
Except where otherwise specified in Contract Documents, suspension systems shall be
classified heavy-duty.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
For Information.
1. Product data.
a. Acoustical panel.
b. Suspension system duty classification.
2. Performance data.
a. Manufacturer's load rating for each anchoring device.
3. Certificates.
a. Fire hazard classification.
4. Samples.
a. Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long samples
of exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and cross
tees.
Shop Drawings.
1. Layout and details of acoustical ceilings. Show locations of items which are to be
coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings.
C.
C.
For Closeout.
1. Certificates.
a. Fire hazard classification data.
D.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Upon completion of Work, deliver to Owner extra tile in full cartons equal to not less than 5
percent of installed area of each size, pattern, and color used on project.
2. Furnish in original boxes, properly labeled.
E.
Fire Hazard Classification Data.

1. Submit certifications for interior materials attesting to compliance with specified fire/smoke
ratings.
2. Notarized affidavits shall state.
a. Name of product, name of nationally recognized testing laboratory, laboratory test
number, date and test results.
b. Product is installed as tested.
c. If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have an
Underwriter's Laboratory classification of acoustical performance on every carton,
subcontractor shall be required to send material from every production run appearing
on the job to an independent or NVLAP approved laboratory for testing, at the
architect's or owner's discretion. All products not conforming to manufacturer's
current published values must be removed, disposed of and replaced with complying
product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work.

A.
Quality control provisions of Division 01, General Requirements, apply to this Section.
B.
Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single
manufacturer.
C.
Fire Hazard Classification.

1. Materials tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 to meet fire hazard classification.
a. Interior finish and trim.
1) Class A: Flame spread, 0 to 25.
2) Smoke developed, 0 to 450.
03243-00.000

KAHN SOUTH, INC.
09 5113 - 2
D.
Regulatory Requirements.
1. Refer to Section 01 4100 Regulatory Requirements - Seismic Control, for anchorage of
acoustical panel ceilings.

A.
requirements.
B.
Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in
a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
C.
Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized
moisture content. Refer to manufacturers directions for product requirements.
D.
Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or
replace acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to:
C.
1.
Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping as a result of defects in materials or factory

workmanship.
2.
Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects
3.
Acoustical Panels with BioBlock Plus or designated as inherently resistive to the growth of
micro-organisms installed with Armstrong suspension systems: Visible sag and will resist
the growth of mold/mildew and gram positive and gram negative odor and stain causing
bacteria.
4.
Warranty Period Humiguard:

a.
Acoustical panels: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.
b.
Grid: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.
c.
Acoustical panels and grid systems with HumiGuard Plus or HumiGuard Max
performance supplied by one source manufacturer is thirty (30) years from date of
substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ASSEMBLIES
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Suspension Systems.
1. In accordance with requirements of ASTM C 635 with following modifications.
a. Section 7.1: When items not meeting Specifications are discovered, items shall be
marked and removed from site immediately.
b. Section 13.2: Contractor shall be responsible to see that applied ceiling loads do not
exceed load recommendations published by suspension system manufacturer
c. Install hangers and framing necessary to reduce spans and applied loads to
recommendations.
2. Maximum deflection of any spanning component shall not exceed span/360.
3. Duty rating of suspension system shall be classified in compliance with ASTM C 635.
4. Except where otherwise specified in Contract Documents, suspension systems shall be
classified heavy-duty.
03243-00.000

KAHN SOUTH, INC.
09 5113 - 3
B.
Exposed Suspension Grid System.

1. Die cut and interlocking components, with concealed hold-down clips, splices, and
perimeter moldings as required.
2. Perimeter moldings.
a. Same material and finish as main and cross runners.
b. L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid.
c. Gasket: Closed cell rubber sponge tape.
3. Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty.
a. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.
b. Acceptable Product: Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee as manufactured by Armstrong
World Industries, Inc.
c. Construction: Double web.
d. Exposed surface finish of flush grid components: Low sheen white.
e. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 HD.
f. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.
g. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, prestretched, with a yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than
12 gauge.
h. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated
or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations,
including light fixtures, that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated.
Provide moldings with exposed flange of the same width as exposed runner.
C.
Mineral Acoustic Panels.

1. Noncombustible Class 25.
2. Factory applied, standard white washable paint finish.
3. Surface Texture: Fine
4. Composition: Mineral Fiber
5. Size: 24in X 24in X 3/4in
6. Edge Profile: Angled Tegular for interface with Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee.
7. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product
carton, 0.70.
8. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product
carton, 35
9. Emissions Testing: Section 01350 Protocol, < 13.5 ppb of formaldehyde when used under
typical conditions required by ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, "Ventilation for Acceptable
Indoor Air Quality"
10. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL)
11. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; White Panel: Light Reflectance: 0.86.
12. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus - Temperature is between 32F (0 C) and 120F
(49 C). It is not necessary for the area to be enclosed or for HVAC systems to be
functioning. All wet work (plastering, concrete, etc) must be complete and dry.
13. Antimicrobial Protection: BioBlock Plus - Resistance against the growth of mold/mildew
and gram positive and gram negative odor and stain causing bacteria.
14. Acceptable Products: Acoustical panel ceiling (standard)
a. Armstrong Beveled Tegular Cirrus, #584 (Class A).
b. Celotex Bevel Edge Cashmere, #CMB-124 (Class A) - #PCMB-124 (FR).
c. USG Acoustone Frost Bevel Edge, #419 (Class A) - #406 (FR).
03243-00.000

KAHN SOUTH, INC.
09 5113 - 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
General.
1. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CISCA Ceiling Systems Handbook.
a. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations, in accordance with ASTM C
636.
B.
Suspension System.
1. Hanger wires.
a. Secure to structure above only.
b. Do not secure hangers to.
1) Metal roof deck.
2) Mechanical components, such as ducts, pipes, accessories.
3) Electrical components, such as conduit, accessories.
4) Electrical raceways in cellular floor systems.
5) Walls or partition framing.
c. Do not extend through ducts or to cause interference with runs of ducts.
d. Use hanger attachment devices.
e. Space 4 feet on centers for carrying channels or main runners.
f.
Space at perimeters of suspension systems no greater than 6 inches from grid edge.
g. Install plumb.
h. Do not press against insulation covering ducts or pipes.
i.
Brace or counter-splay to offset horizontal force of splayed hangers.
j.
In systems where hanger wires are secured to special attachment devices supporting
carrying channels or main runners, attachment devices shall have certified load test
data from independent test laboratory and be capable of carrying 5 times design load.
2. Main runners.
a. Interlock to form sturdy, level, square-angled ceiling grid.
b. Install to level within 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
c. Determine levelness from measurements taken below hanger points.
1) Take measurements after completion of ceiling installations but prior to building
occupancy.
2) Perform leveling with supporting hanger taut to prevent subsequent downward
movement when ceiling loads are imposed.
3) Do not kink or bend hanger wires as means of leveling.
d. Tightly wrap and sharply bend wire loops to prevent vertical movement or rotation of
member within loops.
e. Joint connection shall align exposed surfaces within vertical and horizontal distance
of 0.015 inch.
3. Cross runners.
a. Install to within 1/32 inch of required center distances, noncumulative beyond 12 feet.
b. Form right angles with main runners.
c. Exposed surfaces of 2 intersecting runners shall lie within vertical distance of 0.015
inch of each other with cross member always above main member.
4. Perimeter moldings.
a. Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other
interruptions.
b. Install continuous gasket.
c. Use longest practical lengths.
d. Overlap and rivet corners.
e. Where round obstructions and bullnose concrete masonry occur, provide preformed
closures to match perimeter molding.
03243-00.000

KAHN SOUTH, INC.
09 5113 - 5
5.
Assembly devices shall limit horizontal gaps between exposed surfaces of abutting or
intersecting members to not more than 0.020 inch.
6. Spring wire clips used for supporting main runners shall maintain tight contact between
main runners and carrying channels when ceiling loads are imposed on runners.
7. Fixtures.
a. Prepare suspension system to accept fixtures without compromising ceiling
performance.
b. If fixture dead load causes support runners to exceed allowable deflection of
suspension system, install supplemental hangers within 6 inches of each fixture
corner.
c. Runners supporting ceiling fixtures shall not rotate more than 2 degrees after fixture
loads are imposed.
d. If fixture installation produces rotation of runners in excess of 2 degrees, furnish and
install suitable accessory devices to symmetrically support fixture on runners.
e. Review Contract Documents for number, size, spacing, location, and types of fixtures
to be accommodated in or above ceiling.
f.
Exclude from this Section lighting fixtures and securement of lighting fixtures to
suspension system.
8. Coordination.
a. Prior to beginning acoustical ceiling construction, designate areas of potential
interference between ceiling components and components from other contractors.
b. Communicate with other contractors to achieve coordinated installation.
c. Report areas of interference that arise following beginning of ceiling construction to
Architect's Field Representative as soon as interference is observed.
9. Include additional carrying channels, sheet metal, metal furring, and construction
necessary to incorporate components shown on drawings, including drapery tracks and
closures.
10. Where steel beams are indicated to be fireproofed, coordinate construction to result in
correct fireproofing and ceiling installation without additional cost to Owner.
C.
Acoustic Ceiling Panels.

1. Fit accurately into suspension system.
2. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations with neat and precise fit.
3. Install with undamaged edges.
4. Arrange directionally patterned panels with pattern running in parallel to long axis of room.
5. For square edge panels, install with edges fully hidden by flanges of runners and
moldings.
6. For reveal edge panels, install with bottom of reveal in full contact with top surface of
runner flanges.
7. Paint exposed cut edges to match panel face.
8. Touch up acoustic ceiling to leave in neat, first-class condition, free from defects.
9. Acoustic Ceiling Panels shall not be installed until all work above ceiling has been
completed and temperature and humidity will be maintained as indicated for final
occupancy.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000

KAHN SOUTH, INC.
09 5113 - 6
SECTION 09 6500
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Section 03 5400 - Cast Underlayment.

A.
ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2008.
B.
ASTM F 150 - Standard Test Method for Electrical Resistance of Conductive and Static
Dissipative Resilient Flooring; 2006.
C.
ASTM F 710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;
2008.
D.
ASTM F 1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; 2004.
E.
ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2002.
F.
ASTM F 1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of
Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2004.
G.
ASTM F 2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor
Slabs Using In Situ Probes; 2002.
H.
RFCI WP - Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; 1998.
I.
SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
For Review.
1. Samples for verification.
a. Each tile color.
b. Each sheet flooring color.
c. Base: 6 inches long, each type.
d. Submit two samples 12 inches by 12 inches in size illustrating color and pattern for
each resilient flooring product specified.
2. Shop Drawings.
a. Indicate seaming plan and floor pattern layouts.
3. Product Data.
a. Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics, including sizes, patterns and colors available and installation
instructions.
4. Maintenance Data.
a. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials and
suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping and re-waxing.
C.
For Information.
1. Product data.
a. Each flooring type.
b. Each required item.
2. Certificates.
a. Silicone-free.
b. Fire hazard classification data.
3. Manufacturer's instructions.
a. Installation of each material.
03243-00.000
RESILIENT FLOORING
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
09 6500 - 1
D.
For Closeout.
1. Certificates.
a. Silicone-free.
b. Fire hazard classification data.
2. Maintenance data.
a. For each material.
E.

1. Submit certifications for interior materials attesting to compliance with specified fire/smoke
ratings.
2. Notarized affidavits shall state.
a. Name of product, name of nationally recognized testing laboratory, laboratory test
number, date and test results.
b. Product is installed as tested.
F.
Silicones.
1. Materials and equipment for this Project: Silicone-free.
2. Factory installed or field applied lubricants, sealants, coatings, and gasketing, containing
silicones are prohibited.
3. Submit written certification that materials and equipment installed or consumed in
construction are free from traces of silicone.

A.

1. Materials tested to meet fire hazard classification.
a. Critical radiant flux: 0.45 watts per square centimeter or greater, in accordance with
ASTM E 648.
B.
Installer Qualifications.
1. For moisture control coating: Factory trained Ardex LevelMaster Elite Installer with not
less than three years documented experience in installing Ardex Moisture Control System.

A.
requirements.

A.
Temperature in areas of installation shall be at least 65 degrees F for 48 hours prior to, during,
and 48 hours after installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Resilient Flooring and Base.

1. Flexco Company, Tuscumbia, Alabama 35674: www.flexcofloors.com.
1. Armstrong Commercial Flooring, Lancaster, PA, www.armstrong.com
2. Johnsonite Division, Duramax, Inc., Chagrin Falls, Ohio 44023: www.johnsonite.com.
3. Mannington Commercial, Calhoun, Georgia 30701: www.mannington.com.
4. Roppe Rubber Corporation, Fostoria, Ohio 44830: www.roppe.com.
B.
Molding Accessories.
1. Flexco Company, Tuscumbia, Alabama 35674: www.flexcofloors.com.
1. Armstrong Commercial Flooring, Lancaster, PA, www.armstrong.com
2. Johnsonite Division, Duramax, Inc., Chagrin Falls, Ohio 44023: www.johnsonite.com.
3. Mannington Commercial, Calhoun, Georgia 30701: www.mannington.com.
4. Roppe Rubber Company, Fostoria, Ohio 44830: www.roppe.com.
03243-00.000
RESILIENT FLOORING
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
09 6500 - 2
5.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Cast underlayment, in accordance with Section 03 5400.
B.
Resilient Sheet.
1. Material: Solid vinyl sheet in accordance with ASTM F 1303, Type II, Grade A, Class A.
a. Thickness: 0.078 - 0.099 inch.
b. Stain resistant.
2. Color and pattern: Refer to Finish Schedule and Finish Plans.
a. Refer to Room Finish Schedule.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
C.
Resilient Tile.
1. Material: Vinyl composition tile, homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness
and in accordance with ASTM F 1066 of class corresponding to type specified..
2. Thickness: 1/8 to 5/32 (0.120 to 0.179) inch.
3. Size: 12 by 12 inches.
4. Pattern: Marbleized directional.
5. Installation: Checkerboard (grain perpendicular to adjacent tiles)
6. Acceptable product: Refer to Room Finish and Color Schedule.
D.
Adhesives and similar application materials as recommended by flooring manufacturer.

1. VOC Content of Interior Adhesives: Provide interior adhesives that comply with following
limits for VOC content when calculated according to South Coast Air Quality Management
District Rule No.1168:
a. Rubber flooring adhesives: 60 g/L.
b. VCT flooring adhesive: 50 g/L.
c. Cove base adhesives: 50 g/L.
E.
Resilient Base.
1. General.
a. Gauge: 1/8 inch.
b. Smooth and free of imperfections.
c. Use longest available lengths cut from roll stock.
d. External corners: Premolded.
2. Resilient Base Decorative Profile.
a. Style: Top-set coved.
b. Material: Rubber.
c. Height: 4 1/2 inches
d. Refer to Finish Schedule and Finish Plans
3. Resilient Base Coved.
a. Style: Top-set coved.
b. Material: Rubber.
c. Height: 4 inches.
d. Refer to Finish Schedule and Finish Plans
F.
Moisture Control Coating.

1. Two-coat, two-part epoxy coating supplied in pre-measured containers.
2. Designed to reduce moisture emission to less than 3 pounds per square foot of coated
slab-on-ground.
3. Acceptable product.
a. Ardex Moisture Control System consisting of P-MC Primer and S-MC Sealer by
Ardex Engineered Cements: www.ardex.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
G.
Reducer Strips.
03243-00.000
RESILIENT FLOORING
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
09 6500 - 3
1.
a. Schulter Systems; SCHIENE.
b. Mannington Commercial, Calhoun, Georgia 30701; www.mannington.com.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks
that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface
hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work,
are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
C.
Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring
installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710;
obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
1. Make appropriate tests to determine that subfloor is dry.
a. For installations of resilient flooring over slab on-or-below grade, manufacturer's
representative shall perform moisture testing to meet manufacturer's minimum
requirements for moisture content prior to installation of flooring.
b. In accordance with ASTM F 1869 or F 2170.
c. Taped plastic sheeting is not acceptable method.
d. Perform moisture emission tests when environmental conditions closely
approximating anticipated in-service conditions to avoid false acceptable readings
due to lack of vapor drive.
2. Test to determine that pH of subfloor is within adhesive manufacturer's requirements.
D.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Concrete Subfloor.
1. Moisture control coating for slab-on-ground.
a. Fill non-moving cracks and joints with epoxy material recommended by moisture
control coating manufacturer. Honor moving (expansion and isolation) joints up
through moisture control coating and underlayment.
b. Verify that surface cleanliness, profile, and moisture emission level comply with
moisture control coating manufacturer's written instructions.
c. Apply first (primer) coat and allow to dry in accordance with moisture control coating
manufacturer's written instructions.
d. Apply second (sealer) coat at 90 degrees to direction of first coat and broadcast fine
sand (98.5 percent passing No. 35 sieve) while still fresh (typically not more than 30
minutes).
e. After second coat is dry (typically not less than 16 hours), broom sweep and vacuum
loose sand off surface.
f.
Protect coated surface prior to application of cementitious underlayment.
2. Thoroughly dry prior to laying resilient flooring without exception.
3. Call to the attention of Architect's Field Representative subfloor not in correct condition to
receive resilient flooring.
4. Installation of resilient flooring shall be considered an acceptance of subfloor surface.
5. Broom clean, free from hardening compounds, dust, scale, or similar objectionable matter.
6. Remove paint, varnish, or oil stains.
7. When in contact with ground, prime with primer recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer before application of adhesive.
8. Install cast underlayment in accordance with Section 03 5400.
03243-00.000
RESILIENT FLOORING
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
09 6500 - 4
9. Completely remove existing resilient floor covering in accordance with RFCI WP.
10. No permanent markers are to be used on concrete subfloor by installers due to bleeding
and absorption of vinyl products.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Resilient Components.
1. Use adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
2. Firmly press into full bed of adhesive with surface even, flush, and neatly fitted at joints.
3. Lay out to:
a. Extend into adjacent spaces, such as closets and recesses
b. Extend into recesses and openings.
c. Extend under radiation.
d. Closely fit around columns, piers, floor grilles, and openings.
e. Abut vertical surfaces.
B.
Install Resilient Sheet Flooring.

1. In accordance with manufacturer's standard instructions, unless otherwise specified in
Contract Documents.
2. Apply with epoxy adhesive.
3. With surface even and flush with adjacent sheet flooring.
4. Free from high or low edges and corners.
5. Joints.
a. With joints in straight lines, parallel, or at right angles to principal walls.
b. At resilient sheet, heat welded.
6. Bases.
a. At resilient sheet RSF-A, flash cove base.
1) Integral with flooring.
2) 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated in Contract Documents.
3) Cap exposed top edge with molding.
4) Cove formed with concealed fillet strip.
7. To carry through door openings to form flush thresholds, unless otherwise shown on
drawings.
C.
Install Resilient Tile.

1. Lay out to:
a. Use not less than 1/2 tile.
b. Use equal size tiles on opposite sides of rooms and corridors.
c. Orient directional pattern grain in one direction in each space as determined by
Architect's Field Representative.
d. Orient directional pattern grain in one direction.
2. In accordance with manufacturer's standard instructions, unless otherwise specified in
Contract Documents.
3. Apply with epoxy adhesive.
4. Apply with waterproof adhesive.
5. With surface even and flush with adjacent tiles.
6. Free from high or low edges and corners.
7. With joints in straight lines, parallel or at right angles to principal walls.
8. With tight joints.
9. To carry through door openings to form flush thresholds, unless otherwise shown on
Drawings.
D.
Resilient Base.
1. Use premolded external corners.
2. Apply to exposed surfaces of casework, including knee spaces unless otherwise noted on
drawing.
3. Exclude base for exposed surfaces of casework.
03243-00.000
RESILIENT FLOORING
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
09 6500 - 5
4.
5.
E.
Exclude base on wall surfaces concealed by casework.

Stop at intersection where casework abuts walls.
Resilient Molding Accessories.

1. Use cove cap at edges where flooring turns up wall as integral cove, as edge trim for
panels and similar locations shown on drawings.
2. Use reducer strips at intersections between floorings of different thicknesses.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Thoroughly clean flooring at completion of installation.

1. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly to remove any loose dirt, dust and other foreign
materials.
2. Refer to manufacturer's instruction on maintenance for a newly installed floor, preparation
for commercial use and regular maintenance.
B.
Immediately before turning project over to Owner, seal and wax resilient floors in accordance
with printed specification of Hillyard Chemical Company or other approved.
C.
Finish by buffing in accordance with manufacturer's directions to present a burnished gloss

appearance.
D.
Surface shall not be slippery.
E.
Treat and finish flooring to nonslippery, low satin gloss.
F.
Do not scrub floor with steel wool pads, wire brushes, aggressive floor cleaners or cleansers.
These products can cause severe scratching and damage to the floor surface.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect floors with building paper until building is ready for occupancy.
B.
Tape joints in building paper.
C.
Furnish and place plywood or hardboard covers over vinyl sheet flooring where traffic or moving
of heavy loads might puncture protective sheets.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
RESILIENT FLOORING
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
09 6500 - 6
SECTION 09 9100
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;
2010.
B.
ASTM D523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss; 2008.
C.
ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Base Materials; 2007.
D.
GreenSeal GC-03 - Anti-Corrosive Paints, Second Edition, January 7, 1997.
E.
GreenSeal GS-11 - Architectural Paints; 1993.
F.
MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; 2004.
G.
SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
H.
40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
For Review.
1. Samples for verification.
a. Three paper drop samples 8-1/2 by 11 inches (216 by 279 mm) in size, illustrating
colors of specified products.
b. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Architect before preparing
samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required.
C.
For Information.
1. Product data.
a. Provide complete list of products to be used, with following information for each.
1) Manufacturers name, product name and/or catalog number, and general
product category (such as alkyd enamel).
b. Cross reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include
description of each system.
2. Performance data.
a. Recommended in-place wet or dry film thicknesses.
b. Gloss ratings.
c. Paint analysis.
d. Technical data.
3. Manufacturers instructions.
a. For preparation.
b. For application.
4. Certificates.
a. Manufacturers statement that product comply with Contract Documents and are
compatible with substrates and with other products.
5. Maintenance data.
a. Cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.
D.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Supply 1 gallon of each color, type, and surface texture; store where directed.
2. Label each container with color, type, and texture in addition to manufacturer's label.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
PAINTING
09 9100 - 1
1.03 MOCK-UP
A.
Refer to Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.
B.
Provide door and frame assembly illustrating coating color, texture, and finish.
C.
Provide wall finish mock up on wall painted 3 feet long by 3 feet wide, illustrating coating color,
texture and finish. Locate where directed by owner.
D.
Mock-up may remain as part of work.

A.
requirements.

A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature
ranges required by paint product manufacturer.
B.
Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C.
Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside humidity
ranges required by paint product manufacturer.
D.
Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F
for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
General.
1. Use materials listed under heading, Paint Systems Schedule.
2. To substitute manufacturers and materials other than those specified, submit for
acceptance schedule of proposed items in form identical to heading, Paint Systems
Schedule.
3. Do not deliver unaccepted materials to site.
4. Provide ready mixed paints and coatings.
5. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
B.
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content.

1. Provide coatings that comply with most stringent requirements specified in following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b. USGBC LEED-NC Rating System, Version 2.2, specifically:
1) Opaque topcoats:
(a) Flat: 50 g/L, maximum.
(b) Nonflat: 150 g/L, maximum.
(c) Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to
tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2) Anti-corrosive paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates:
(a) 250 g/L, Green Seal GC-03.
C.
Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not
specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified; commercial quality.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
PAINTING
09 9100 - 2
D.
Patching Material: Latex filler.
E.
Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
F.
Gloss Criteria.
1. Trade names will not be accepted as gloss level identification.
2. Determine gloss value of paint finish by testing paint samples according to ASTM D523,
using 60 degree geometry.
3. Paint samples shall be 4 mils thick and approximately 48 hours old, except that epoxy
paints shall be fully cured.
4. Interior finish paint systems gloss values.
a. Alkyd, semigloss: Between 40 and 60 degrees.
b. Alkyd, eggshell: Between 7 and 15 degrees.
c. Latex, gloss: Between 60 and 80 degrees.
d. Latex, semigloss: Between 40 and 60 degrees.
e. Latex, eggshell: Between 10 and 20 degrees.
f.
Epoxy: 65 degrees or greater.
G.
Provide colors as described in Room Finish and Color Schedule.
H.
Workmanship shall be of highest grade.
I.
High traffic areas: corridors and stairwells require a Level 5 finish.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide paint and coating products from same manufacturer.
B.
In event single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor exceptions shall be
permitted, provided approval of Architect is obtained using specified procedures for
substitutions.
C.
Acceptable Manufacturers.
1. Devoe: Devoe Coatings, a brand of Akzo Nobel Paints LLC, Strongsville, Ohio 44136:
www.devoecoatings.com.
2. Pittsburgh: Pittsburgh Paints, PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania
15272: www.pittsburghpaints.com.
3. Sherwin-Williams: The Sherwin-Williams Company, Cleveland, Ohio 44101:
www:sherwin-williams.com (as specified).
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULE

A.
Interior Paint Systems.

1. Latex, semigloss.
a. Undercoat for wood.
1) Pittsburgh; Speedhide Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater 6-855.
2) Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Wall & Wood Interior Oil Primer/Undercoater
B49W2.
b. Undercoat for steel.
1) Devoe; Devflex DTM Flat Interior/Exterior WB Primer & Finish 4020 PF.
2) Pittsburgh; Pitt-Tech Interior/Exterior DTM Primer/Finish 90-712.
3) Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish B66W1.
c. Undercoat for galvanized steel.
2) Pittsburgh; Pitt-Tech Interior/Exterior DTM Primer/Finish 90-712..
3) Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66-310.
d. Undercoat for aluminum.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
PAINTING
09 9100 - 3
e.
2.
3.
Undercoat for concrete masonry units.

1) Pittsburgh; Speedhide Interior/Exterior Latex Masonry Block Filler 6-7.
2) Sherwin-Williams; Cement-Plex 875, B42W200.
f.
Undercoat for gypsum board.
1) Pittsburgh; Speedhide Interior Q.D. Latex Sealer 6-2.
2) Sherwin-Williams; ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Primer B28W600.
g. Finish coats (2).
1) Pittsburgh; Speedhide Interior Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 6-510 Series.
2) Sherwin-Williams; MacroPoxy 646-100, B58 Series.
Latex, eggshell.
a. Undercoat for steel.
1) Devoe; Devflex DTM Flat Interior/Exterior WB Primer & Finish 4020 PF
3) Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish B66W1.
b. Undercoat for galvanized steel.
2) Pittsburgh; Speedhide Water Base Inhibitive Metal Primer 6-712.
3) Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS B50WZ30.
c. Undercoat for aluminum.
d. Undercoat for concrete masonry units.
1) Pittsburgh; Speedhide Interior/Exterior Latex Masonry Block Filler 6-7.
2) Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler B25W25.
e. Undercoat for gypsum board.
2) Sherwin-Williams; ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Primer B28W600.
f.
Finish coats (2).
1) Pittsburgh; Speedhide Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel 6-411 Series.
2) Sherwin-Williams; ProGreen 200, eggshell, B20-600 series
Waterborne dryfall flat.
a. Undercoat for steel.
2) Pittsburgh; Pitt-Tech Interior/Exterior DTM Primer/Finish, 90-712.
3) Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50Z Series.
b. Undercoat for galvanized steel.
2) Sherwin-Williams; Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall B42W1.
c. Undercoat for aluminum.
d. Undercoat for masonry.
e. Finish coat.
1) Pittsburgh; Speedhide Interior Latex Flat Dry Fog Spray Paint 6-715 Series.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
PAINTING
09 9100 - 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SCOPE SURFACES TO BE FINISHED
A.
Paint exposed surfaces except where indicated not to be painted or to remain natural; term
"exposed" includes areas visible through permanent and built-in fixtures when they are in place.
B.
Refer to other Sections when figuring this work, to become thoroughly familiar with character,
amount, and other conditions of work.
C.
Provide scaffolds and staging required for proper execution of work.
D.
Paint the surfaces described in PART 2, indicated on drawings, and as follows.

1. If surface, material, or item is not specifically mentioned, paint in same manner as similar
surfaces, materials, or items, regardless of whether colors are indicated or not.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furnishings same as similar exposed
surfaces.
3. Paint surfaces to be concealed behind permanently installed fixtures, equipment, and
furnishings, using primer only, prior to installation of permanent item.
4. Paint back sides of access panels and removable and hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
5. Paint surfaces that are cut and patched to permit installation of electrical facilities, piping,
and ductwork.
6. Finish top, bottom, and side edges of exterior doors same as exposed faces.
7. Paint insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
8. Paint equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in utility areas in colors
according to color coding scheme indicated.
9. Refer to Section 23 0553 and Section 26 0553 for schedule of color coding of equipment,
duct work, piping, and conduit.
10. Paint mechanical and electrical equipment, including that which is factory-finished,
exposed to weather or to view on roof and outdoors.
11. Paint shop-primed mechanical and electrical items occurring in finished areas.
12. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and
electrical components and paint separately.
13. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets to
match face panels.
14. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment
before installing equipment.
15. Repaint existing painted surfaces damaged, abraded, scuffed, or damaged by
construction 1 coat.
16. Include painting of mechanical and electrical items in this Section.
E.
Do not paint or finish following.

1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted; factory-primed items are not
considered factory-finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finish.
3. Items indicated to remain naturally finished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Aluminum components.
6. Polished and brushed stainless steel items.
7. Bronze, terne, and lead items.
8. Metal flashings.
9. Zinc coated guard rails.
10. Interior surfaces of metal siding.
11. Brick.
12. Exterior (weather side) surfaces of concrete.
13. Exterior (weather side) surfaces of precast concrete panels.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
PAINTING
09 9100 - 5
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
F.
Exterior (weather side) surfaces of portland cement plaster.

Interior surfaces enclosing storage rooms.
Interior surfaces enclosing mechanical equipment rooms.
Interior surfaces enclosing electrical equipment rooms.
Interior surface of concrete roof construction.
Floors.
Surfaces of interior steel columns.
Surfaces of interior steel roof framing members.
Surfaces concealed by suspended ceilings.
Concealed piping, ductwork, and conduit.
Surfaces within pipe and duct spaces.
Housing and components inside of roof mounted penthouse heating and ventilating units.
Surfaces within elevator shafts.
Surfaces within elevator cars.
Elevator hoistway doors.
Acoustical materials.
Mesh partitions.
Wood paneling.
Painting Mechanical and Fire Protection Work.

1. Paint exposed interior (in finished areas) and exterior pipe, fittings, ductwork, registers,
and equipment in connection with mechanical and fire protection systems, except factory
enameled and finish painted components.
2. Include painting of pipe hangers, ductwork, supports, and brackets.
3. Do not paint sprinkler heads and polished fire protection components.
4. Do not paint insulated pipe or equipment before insulation is applied.
5. Before painting, clean piping, ductwork, and equipment of scale, dirt, and similar foreign
matter.
6. In general, use same paint system and color as adjacent ceilings or walls, however in
specific instances use Owner's prescribed color code
7. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels and paint separately.
8. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, convector cabinets, and dampers visible through grilles
and louvers with 1 coat of flat black paint.
9. Stencil an inscription on each item of equipment designating its number, its function and
area served.
10. Exclude pipe markers from this Section.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by product manufacturer.
B.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any

condition that may potentially affect proper application.
C.
Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials; report incompatible
primer conditions and submit recommended changes for Architect's approval.
D.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes
unless moisture content of surfaces are below following maximums.
1. Plaster and Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
5. Concrete Floors: 8 percent.
E.
Measure pH factor of concrete, masonry, and mortar before starting any finishing process,
using method specified in MPI Architectural Painting Manual.
F.
Report results in writing to Architect before starting work.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
PAINTING
09 9100 - 6
G.
If results of test indicates need for remedial action, provide written description of remedial
action. If different primer or paint systems is required, state total cost of change. Do not
proceed with remedial action or change without receiving written authorization from Architect.
3.03 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare surfaces as specified in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual and as follows
for applicable surface and coating; if multiple preparation treatments are specified, use as many
as necessary for best results; where Manual references external standards for preparation
(such as SSPC standards), prepare as specified in those standards; comply with coating
manufacturer's specific preparation methods or treatments, if any.
B.
Coordinate painting work with cleaning and preparation work so that dust and other
contaminants do not fall on newly painted, wet surfaces.
C.
Surface Appurtenances: Prior to preparing surfaces or finishing, remove electrical plates,

hardware, light fixtures, light fixture trim, escutcheons, machined surfaces, fittings, and similar
items already installed that are not to be painted.
D.
After completing painting in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in
trades involved.
E.
Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.
F.
Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes.
G.
Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and
bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
H.
Concrete, Cement Plaster and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose
mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with
solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by
weathering of corroding metals with solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting
with water. Allow to dry.
1. Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced
cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease,
oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers
have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
2. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
3. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests as
specified in MPI Manual. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause finish paint to blister
and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture
is present
4. Etch concrete as specified in MPI Manual.
I.
Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime
defects after repair.
J.
Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure

water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer
immediately following cleaning.
1. Test coat anodized treatments with primer as recommended by anodized treatment
manufacturer; if manufacturer can not be reasonably found, test in accordance with
industry standards.
K.
Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
1. Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and
surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from
coil stock by mechanical or chemical methods as recommended as best practice by
primer manufacturer.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
PAINTING
09 9100 - 7
L.
Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt,
and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or
sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution,
ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot
prime after repairs.
1. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with Steel Structures Painting
Council's (SSPC) recommendations. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats
that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint
manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as shop coat.
M. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer
and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with
solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
N.
Interior Wood Items to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
O.
Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
3.04 APPLICATION
A.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified or

recommended by MPI Manual, using the preparation, products, sheens, textures, and colors as
indicated.
B.
Provide completed work matching approved samples for color, texture, and coverage.
C.
Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
D.
Do not apply finishes over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or other
conditions detrimental to formation of durable coating film; do not apply finishes to surfaces that
are not dry.
E.
Use applicators and methods best suited for substrate and type of material being applied and
according to manufacturer's instructions.
1. Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied; use brush of
appropriate size for surface or item being painted; produce results free of visible brush
marks.
2. Roller Application: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as
recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.
3. Spray Application: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
4. Where application method is listed in the MPI Manual for paint system that application
method is required; otherwise any application method recommended by manufacturer for
material used and objects to be painted is acceptable.
F.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's

recommended spreading rate; provide total dry film thickness of entire system as
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Number of coats and film thickness required are same regardless of application method.
G.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats
until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.
H.
Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners
receive dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
I.
Apply finish to completely cover surfaces with uniform appearance without brush marks, runs,
sags, laps, ropiness, holidays, spotting, cloudiness, or other surface imperfections.
J.
Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.
K.
Terminate paint with neat line.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
PAINTING
09 9100 - 8
L.
Before applying finish coats, apply prime coat of material recommended by manufacturer,
unless surface has been prime coated by others; where evidence of suction spots or unsealed
areas in first coat appear, recoat primed and sealed surfaces to ensure finish coat with no burn
through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
M. Apply first coat to surface that has been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared as soon as
practical after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
N.
Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by
manufacturer.
O.
Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat will not cause the undercoat to lift or
lose adhesion.
P.
If manufacturer's instructions recommend sanding to produce smooth, even surface, sand

between coats.
Q.
Before applying next coat vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove
dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.
R.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Provide smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color,
appearance, and coverage.
S.
Stippled Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to even, fine texture; leave no evidence of rolling,
such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections; back roll final
coat to achieve uniform surface.
T.
Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.

A.
Refer to Section 01 4000, for general requirements for field inspection.
B.
Inspect and test questionable coated areas in accordance with Master Painters Institute
Architectural Painting Specification Manual.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Collect waste material which may constitute fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
B.
At end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials
from site.
3.07 PROTECTION
A.
Protect other work, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage
by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as approved by Architect.
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
C.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in MPI Manual.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
PAINTING
09 9100 - 9
SECTION 10 2601
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Corner guards.

A.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for wall and corner guard anchors.
B.
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.
B.
ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of
Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2010.
C.
2010b.
D.
ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;
2011.
E.
ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2010.
F.
NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films; 2010.

A.
Coordinate work with wall or partition sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor
devices.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
For Information.
1. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, anchorage details, and rough-in
measurements.
C.
For Review.
1. Samples for verification: Submit two sections of corner guard, 24 inch long, illustrating
component design, configuration, color and finish.
D.
Certificates: Fire hazard classification.
E.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special

attention .

A.
Fire Hazard Classification.

1. Materials tested to meet fire hazard classification.
a. Class A: Flame spread, 0 to 25.
b. Smoke developed: 0 to 450, in accordance with ASTM E84.
c. Critical radiant flux: 0.45 watts per square centimeter or greater, in accordance with
ASTM E648.
d. Vertical flame test: Passes in accordance with NFPA 701.

A.
requirements.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

10 2601 - 1
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Wall and Corner Guards:

1. C/S: Construction Specialties, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com.
2. IPC: InPro Corporation: www.inprocorp.com.
3. Pawling: Pawling Corporation, Architectural Products Division: www.pawling.com.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A.
Corner Guards - Surface Mounted: High impact vinyl with extruded aluminum partial height
retainer and integral impact absorbing device.
1. Performance: Resist lateral impact force of 100 lbs at any point without damage or
permanent set.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide assemblies with flame spread index of 25 or
less and smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E84.
3. Size: 2 inches.
4. Corner: 1/4 inch Radiused.
5. Color: As scheduled.
6. Length: One piece 4'-0" high.
7. Preformed end caps.
B.
Mounting Brackets and Attachment Hardware: Appropriate to component and substrate.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Plastic.
1. Polyvinyl chloride extrusions.
2. Matte finish.
3. Satin grain surface.
4. Grain of surface identical for returns, caps, corners, and rail.
5. Refer to Room Finish and Color Schedule.
2.04 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.
B.
Pre-drill holes for attachment.
C.
Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth.
D.
Plastic Corner Guards.

1. Brackets same material and color as guards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured
rigidly in position to wall framing members only.
B.
Position corner guard above top of base. Refer to contract documents details.
C.
Coordinate installation of vinyl fabric wall covering with corner guard frame and cover.
D.
Corner Guards, Surface Mounted.

1. Apply to wall surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

10 2601 - 2
3.02 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1/4 inch.
B.
Maximum Variation From Level or Plane For Visible Length: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

10 2601 - 3
SECTION 10 4400
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Fire extinguishers.

A.
NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2010.
B.
UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current

edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for wall bracket
mounted measurements.
C.
Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage
details.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F.
Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.

A.
Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher
ingredients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers:
1. Ansul, Inc; Product: www.ansul.com.
2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co; Product MP Series: www.larsensmfg.com.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A.
Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable
codes, whichever is more stringent.
1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL for the purpose specified and indicated.
B.
Multi-purpose Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage.
1. Class: A:B:C.
2. Size: 10 pound.
3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, red color.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Secure rigidly in place.

END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

10 4400 - 1
SECTION 12 2113
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
For Review.
1. Shop drawings.
a. Layouts or schedules.
2. Samples for selection.
a. Color fan deck.

A.
requirements.
1.03 WARRANTY
A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Bali, division of Springs Window Fashions, Fort Mill, South Carolina 29716:
www.swfcontract.com.
B.
Hunter Douglas Perimeters, Los Angeles, California 90015: www.hunterdouglas.com.
C.
Levolor Contract, High Point, North Carolina 27265: www.levolor.com.
D.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A.
Include head channels, valances, tilters, cord locks, drum and cradles, tilt rods, tilt wands, end
braces, installation brackets, intermediate brackets, braided ladders, slats, bottom rails and lift
cords, and operators and controls.
B.
Horizontal Louver Blinds.

1. Mounting: Within window jamb to above surface, full height.
2. Vane color: Same on both sides.
3. Vane material: Spring Tempered Aluminum, unperforated.
4. Vane size: 1 inch wide.
5. Vane Thickness: .008Inch, minimum.
6. Permanent dust guard feature.
7. Operation: Manual.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Blinds shall have color uniformity and be free of sharp edges, burrs, or similar defects which
compromise operation or are harmful to persons or materials in contact with blinds.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Take field measurements prior to ordering blinds. Extra compensation will not be made as
result of Contractor's failure to observe or become familiar with conditions under which
Contractor will work.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

12 2113 - 1
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Mount brackets securely to concrete, wood, or hollow construction to support weight of blinds
plus forces applied for operation.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust blinds for smooth operation.
B.
Cords and operational components shall operate without application of undue force.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

12 2113 - 2
SECTION 12 3553.13
METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Metal shelving.
B.
Slot wall.
C.
End caps.
D.
Metal base.

A.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010.
B.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
C.
ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2011
D.
NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers

Association; 2005.
E.
SEFA 2.3 - Installation of Scientific Laboratory Furniture and Equipment; 2006.
F.
SEFA 3 - Work Surfaces; 2006.
G.
SEFA 7 - Laboratory and Hospital Fixtures; 2006.
H.
SEFA 8 - Laboratory Casework; 2006.

A.
Large Components: Ensure that large components can be moved into final position without
damage to other construction.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Casework locations, large scale plans, elevations, cross sections, rough-in
and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances, clearances required, and utility locations, if
any.
C.
Samples For Color Selection: Color charts for each different finish material submit for approval
by Interior Designer.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
E.
Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's recommendations for care and cleaning.

A.

this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Metal Laboratory Casework:

1. H.L. Coshatt Company, Inc.; www.hlcoshatt.com, Jessica Schniper, 205.833.2446 or
205.910.5878 (Lozier Corp.) as specified.
2. Madix; www.madixinc.com, 800.633.6282.
3. MEG; www.megfixtures.com, 800.645.3315.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

12 3553.13 - 1
2.02 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK AND MATERIALS

A.
Slot Wall Rx Shelving: Die-formed metal sheet; each unit self-contained and not dependent on
adjacent units or building structure for rigidity; factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -finished.
1. Top: Steel bracket with baked on epoxy coating. Color to be submitted and approved by
Interior Designer.
2. Back: Slotwall "T" slot, 3" on center medium density fiberboard (MDF) substrate, having
an internal bond strenth of 110# per square inche minimum or equal. All panels shall
have formaldehyde emissions of .3 PPM or less and shall comply with HUD 24 CFR Part
3280 Standards set fourth for particleboard panels. Finish to be modified melamine
enamel that is baked to achieve outstanding performance characteristics. Color to be
submitted and approved by Interior Designer.
3. Slotwall Center, Splicer and Bottom Rail: Heavy duty Steel, refer to manufacturers
required count for size and height specified. Color to be submitted and approved by
Interior Designer.
4. Shelving: 13" shelf depth, Steel with baked on epoxy coating. Color to be submitted and
approved by Interior Designer.
5. End Cap: plywood with High Pressure Laminate: a .030 thick high-pressure laminate
sheet bonded via cold press with polyvinyl acetate (PVA) type II, water resistant
adhesives. Finish color to as specified in contract documents.
6. Base: 2" bottom rail Steel bracket with baked on epoxy coating. Color to be submitted
and approved by Interior Designer.
B.
Gage: min 18 gage thick on all rails and base.

1. Structural Performance: In addition to the requirements of SEFA 3, 7 and 8, provide
components that safely support the following minimum loads, without deformation or
damage:
a. Base Units: 500 pounds per linear foot (744 kg per m) across the cabinet ends.
b. Suspended Units: Minimum 300 pounds (136 kg) static load.
c. Hanging Wall Cases: 300 pounds (136 kg).
d. Shelves: 100 pounds (45 kg).
2. Separation: Use bituminous paint or non-conductive tape to coat metal surfaces in
contact with cementitious materials and to separate dissimilar metals.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify capacity of support framing and anchors.
B.
Verify that service connections are correctly located and of proper characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and with SEFA 2.3.
B.
Use anchoring devices to suit conditions and substrate materials encountered.
C.
Set casework items plumb and square, securely anchored to building structure.
D.
Align cabinets to adjoining components, install filler panels where necessary to close gaps; and
adjacent construction.
E.
Separate dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action.
F.
Replace units that are damaged, including those that have damaged finishes.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating parts, including doors, drawers, hardware, and fixtures, to function smoothly.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean all components.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

12 3553.13 - 2
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity.
B.
Repair damage that occurs prior to Substantial Completion, including finishes, using methods
prescribed by manufacturer; replace units that cannot be repaired to like-new condition.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.

12 3553.13 - 3
SECTION 12 3600
COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Wall-hung counters.

A.
ANSI A161.2 - Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure Decorative Laminate
Countertops; 1998.
B.
C.
ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use;
2009.
D.
ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of
Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2010.
E.
2010b.
F.
AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at

www.awiqcp.org.
G.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
H.
NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation .
C.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square,
representing actual product, color, and patterns.
D.
Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.
E.
Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and

repair of countertop surfaces.

A.
Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Custom

quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items.
B.
Shop shall be a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

A.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES
A.
Quality Standard: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural

Woodwork Standards.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
COUNTERTOPS
12 3600 - 1
B.
Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate.
1. Laminate Sheet: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGP, for postforming, 0.039 inch nominal thickness.
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed
450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
b. Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear
Grade requirements for wear resistance.
c. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20.
d. Surface Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
e. Manufacturers:
1) Panolam Industries International, Inc\Pionite Deborah Emory, 770.845.6673,
deborah_emery@panolam.com: www.pionitelaminates.com.
2) Wilsonart International, Inc : www.wilsonart.com.
2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Postformed laminate; front edge substrate built up to minimum
1-1/4 inch thick with raised radiused edge, integral coved backsplash with radiused top
edge.
3. Exposed Edge Treatment: Molded PVC edge with T-spline, sized to completely cover
edge of panel.
a. Color: As scheduled.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Charter Industries: www.charterindustries.com, Bob Floyd 1.800.538.9088 ext.
301.
2) Canplast Inc: www.canplast.com, 514.327.9555.
4. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.
5. Divider Panels: Same material, same construction. Refer to section in contract
documents.
6. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Premium Grade.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A.
Wood-Based Components:
1. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B.
Particleboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.1 Grade 2-M-2, 45 pcf minimum density;
minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines.
C.
Medium Density Fiberboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.2 type as specified in
AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards; composed of wood fibers pressure
bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as
required.
D.
Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of

materials being joined applying recommended standards by AWI/AWMAC/WI to suit
application.
E.
Fasteners: Size and type to suit application, concealed from view.
2.03 FABRICATION
A.
Assembly: Shop assembles countertops for delivery to site in units easily handled and to
permit passage through building openings.
B.
Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.
1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof
glue.
2. Height: refer to millwork sections in contract documents, build as indicated.
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
COUNTERTOPS
12 3600 - 2
D.
Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly
bevel arises.
1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.
E.
Edging: Exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single
length.
F.
Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
G.
Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide brackets and braces as indicated on drawings, finished to

match.
2.04 FACTORY FINISHING

A.
Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.
C.
Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets
are installed in proper locations.
D.
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;
shim where required.
B.
Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate
board of 5/8 inch.
C.
Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.
D.
Power and Data Strip above counter:

1. Refer to electrical specification for all requirements. Coordination required by general
contractor with countertop fabrication with electrical strip.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum.
B.
Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum.
C.
Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
KAHN SOUTH, INC.
COUNTERTOPS
12 3600 - 3
SECTION 21 0500
GENERAL PROVISIONS FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE:
A.
Provisions of this Section apply to all Fire Protection work.
B.
Include the provisions of General Conditions as part of this Section.
C.
Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for the completion of all Fire
Protection work shown or specified, complete and ready for operation, consisting in general of
the following:
1.
Replace all sprinklers within the contract limits, with new listed quick-response type
sprinklers.
2.
Provide sprinkler coverage in all areas within the contract limits.
D.
Give required notices, file drawings, obtain and pay for permits, deposits and fees necessary for
the installation of the Fire Protection work. Obtain and pay for inspections required by laws,
ordinances, rules, regulations or public authority having jurisdiction. Obtain and pay for
certificates of such inspections, and file such certificates with Owner.
E.
Permitting is required for sprinkler system flush-out water discharged to surface waters.
The State Contact:
Alabama Department of Environmental Management
Attn: Water Division
Post Office Box 301463
Montgomery, Alabama 36130-1463
Telephone Number: (334) 271-7823
Fax Number: (334) 279-3051
E-Mail: H2omail@adem.state.al.us
F.
1.2
"Provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for operation.
DRAWINGS:
A.
Fire Protection Drawings are diagrammatic and subject to requirements of Architectural

Drawings and conditions existing in the field. Fire Protection Drawings indicate generally the
location of components and are not intended to show all fittings or all details of the work.
B.
Follow the drawings closely, coordinate dimensions with Architectural Drawings and field
conditions. DO NOT scale Fire Protection drawings for location of system components.
C.
Make no changes without Architect's written permission. In case of doubt, obtain Architect's
decision before proceeding with work. Failure to follow this instruction shall make the Contractor
liable for damage to other work and responsible for removing and repairing defective or misslocated work in proper manner.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

MW/DAVIS DUMAS & ASSOCIATES, INC.
21 0500 - 1
D.
1.3
DO NOT scale drawings to locate sprinkler heads. COORDINATE with lighting and ceiling grids.
Contractor for Fire Protection work is responsible for coordinating with all trades.
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS:

A.
1.4
Comply with the current editions of the following Codes and Standards:
1.
ANSI/B31.9 - Code for Building Services Piping
2.
NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
3.
NFPA 45 - Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals
4.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
5.
NFPA 101 - Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures
6.
Other standards as referenced in other sections of Division 210000
7.
Local Building Code (International Building Code if no local code)
8.
Local Mechanical Code (International Mechanical Code if no local code)
QUALIFICATIONS OF SUBCONTRACTOR:
A.
1.5
The Fire Protection sub-contractor shall meet the following minimum qualifications:
1.
He shall have been in business as a Contractor for Fire Protection work continuously, for
at least 3 years prior to the date of opening bids for this project.
2.
He shall have a satisfactory experience record with Fire Protection installations of

character and scope comparable with this project and shall have completed three such
installations in the past three years.
3.
He shall be qualified, certified and licensed by the State of Alabama Fire Marshal. He
shall meet all laws pertaining to fire protection in the Code of Alabama 1975 and any
amendments of same.
CONFLICTS AND INTERFERENCES:

A.
1.6
If systems interfere or conflict, the Architect shall decide which equipment to relocate regardless
of which was first installed.
WORKMANSHIP:
A.
1.7
Do all work in a neat and first-class manner. Remove and replace work not done in such manner
as directed by the Architect.
COOPERATION:
A.
Cooperate with all other crafts. Perform work in a timely manner. Do not delay the execution of
other work.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

21 0500 - 2
1.8
VISITING SITE:
A.
1.9
Visit site and become familiar with location and various conditions affecting work. No additional
allowance will be granted because of lack of knowledge of such conditions.
MATERIALS:
A.
Unless otherwise noted, provide new, standard, first-grade materials throughout. (All pipe,
fittings and valves shall be manufactured in the U.S.A.)
B.
Where materials or products are specified by manufacturer's name, brand, trade name, or
catalog reference, such named materials or products shall be the basis of the estimate, without
substitution, and shall be furnished under the contract unless requests for equivalents are
approved as noted below. Where two or more brands are named the choice of these shall be
optional with the Contractor.
C.
Equivalents will be considered only if written request for approval has been received by the
Architect (from a general contract bidder) 10 days prior to the date established for receipt of
Proposals. Each request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which an
equivalent is proposed and a complete description of the proposed equivalent including
drawings, cuts, performance and test data, and deviation from the specification and any other
information necessary for evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials,
equipment or other Work that incorporation of the equivalent may require shall be included. The
burden of proof of the merit of the proposed equivalent is upon the proposer. The Architect's
decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed equivalent is final.
D.
If the Architect approves any proposed equivalent prior to receipt of Proposals, approval will be
set forth in an Addendum. DO NOT RELY UPON APPROVALS MADE IN ANY OTHER
MANNER.
E.
No proposed equivalent will be considered after the Contract has been executed, except as
described in the General Conditions.
F.
Within 45 days of execution of contract and before ordering materials or equipment, submit to
Architect and obtain his approval of a detailed list showing each item which is to be furnished by
make, trade name, catalog number, or the like; together with manufacturer's specifications,
certified prints, and other data sufficient for making comparisons with items specified. When
approved, such schedule shall be of equal force with these specifications in that no variation
there from shall be allowed except with Architect's written approval. Submit a minimum of 10
hard copy sets and PDF format files as noted below for approval. Reserve 3 hard copy sets of
approved data for project close-out. Bind all equipment submittals in loose-leaf 3-ring D
binders and provide index and tabs for each type of equipment.
G.
All pressure vessels shall be constructed and tested in accordance with applicable ASME codes
and shall bear ASME stamps. Certificates of inspection and approval shall be submitted to
Architect.
H.
Similar items of equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer.
I.
See ALTERNATES at the end of this Section.
J.
See section, "ALTERNATES".
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

21 0500 - 3
1.10
SHOP DRAWINGS:
A.
Submit a minimum of 6 sets of bond shop drawings. Piping shop drawings shall include drain
and vent locations, pipe slopes down to drains and up to vents, piping elevations, piping
connection details, and a list of piping materials. All shop drawings shall be produced using
AutoCad and a copy of the shop drawing files shall be provided in AutoCad 2004 format on CDROM disks for shop drawing review. A CD-ROM with a copy of all approved shop drawings
shall be provided for project closeout.
B.
Thirty days before starting work, submit Fire Protection shop drawings bearing seals of approval
of Owner's Underwriters and all Governmental Agencies having jurisdiction. Complete shop
drawings are required to be submitted at one time. (See Section 214000.)
C.
Engineers CAD/electronic drawings files will be available upon request for the convenience of
the contractor and use in preparation of shop drawings. A service fee of $50.00 per drawing
sheet file shall be remitted to the Engineer prior to delivery of CAD/electronic drawing files along
with a signed agreement between the Engineer and Contractor.
1.11
RECORD DRAWINGS:
A.
When work starts the Architect will furnish two complete sets of white prints of the Fire
Protection Drawings. All corrections, variations, and deviations, including those required by
change orders, if any, must be recorded in colored ink or colored pencil at the end of each
working day on these drawings. The marked prints shall be available at all times for the
Architect's inspection.
B.
Prior to examining the request for final payment or making any response thereto, the Architect
shall receive from the Contractor one complete set of the white prints, marked as stated above,
indicating the actual completed installation of the work included under this contract.
1.
Accurately show location, size and elevation of new exterior utility work and its
relationship to any existing utilities, obstructions, etc., contiguous to the area of work.
2.
Block out areas modified by change-order & identify them by change-order number.
3.
The Architect will forward the marked white prints to the Consulting Engineers for review.
They will then be returned by the Architect to the Contractor for use in preparing record
drawings.
C.
When work is completed, the Engineers CAD/electronic drawing files will be made available to
the contractor for a service fee of $50.00 per CAD/electronic drawing sheet file for use in
preparing record drawings. Contractor shall transfer the information from the marked white prints
to the CAD files, removing all superseded data in order to show the actual completed conditions.
D.
Fire Protection Drawings shall be a set of CAD shop drawings, up-dated to show actual
conditions at completion of work. Include the contract drawings equipment schedules and
details edited to show actual completed conditions.
1.12
A.
PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT:
During construction, protect Fire Protection equipment from damage or deterioration.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

21 0500 - 4
B.
1.13
When installation is complete, clean equipment and make ready for painting.
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT:
A.
Install equipment to provide normal service access to all components.
B.
Where drawings show sufficient space for removing components, install equipment to provide
such clearance.
C.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. If manufacturer's instructions

conflict with contract documents, obtain Architect's decision before proceeding.
D.
All equipment shall be firmly fastened in place.
1.14
CUTTING AND PATCHING AND INCIDENTAL WORK:
A.
Set sleeves and inserts and lay out and form openings in walls, beams, girders and structural
floors in this Section.
B.
Cut, patch and repair as required to accomplish Fire Protection Work and finish to match
adjacent work. Architect's approval required before cutting any part where strength or
appearance of finished work is involved.
1.15
A.
1.16
REMOVAL OF EXISTING WORK:

Dismantle the following items and remove them from the premises. Upon removal they shall
become the Contractor's property: All unused sprinklers, piping and associated hardware.
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS:
A.
Make connections to existing systems only at time authorized, in writing, by Owner.
B.
Take existing systems and/or equipment out of service only at times authorized in writing by
Owner.
C.
Drain existing systems and fill, vent, test, and put existing systems into operation after
connections have been made.
1.17
SLEEVES:
A.
For pipe through floors inside fire rated chases or through non-fire-rated walls: 20 gauge
galvanized steel, 1" larger than pipe or pipe covering.
B.
For pipe through concrete beams: schedule 40 black steel pipe, 1" larger than pipe or pipe
covering.
C.
For pipe passing through floors outside fire rated chases and fire rated wall and partitions,
provide 20 gauge steel sleeve leaving the annular space between pipe or pipe covering as
required by UL systems. Where pipe is insulated, insulation shall be continuous thru sleeve.
Refer to Section Through-Penetration Firestop Systems where included in the contract
documents. Otherwise, seal between sleeve and pipe or pipe covering with 3M Brand Fire
Barrier CP 25WB caulk, Flamestop V, Specified Technologies, Inc. "Spec Seal Sealant",
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

21 0500 - 5
Rectorseal Corp. Metacaulk 950 or Hilti FSONE bearing UL listing for actual conditions of
installation, thickness and application in strict accord with UL reference for each type installation.
Any equivalents must meet the 10 day prior approval provision and must show UL approval for
all conditions, bare pipe, insulated pipe, etc. For plastic piping material submittal must show UL
approval for each application and if caulk comes in direct contact with pipe, it must be
compatible and not injurious to the pipe.
D.
Set sleeves before concrete is poured or masonry is erected. In existing construction, grout
sleeves firmly in place.
E.
Extend floor sleeves 1-1/2" above finish floor in areas where floor is subject to being wet during
normal usage (mechanical rooms, etc.).
F.
Where exposed pipes pass through walls and partitions in finished spaces, provide chrome
plated F & C plates or escutcheons.
1.18
PIPE IDENTIFICATION:
A.
Identify all piping exposed to view or accessible through removable ceilings or access panels
with plastic snap-on pipe line markers. Color code markers in accordance with ANSI A13.1.
Show pipe contents and direction of flow. (Markers on lines 8" OD and smaller shall be taped in
place; on lines over 8" OD secure with spring clips.) Markers shall be equal to Craftmark, Brady,
Seton or Brimar.
B.
Protect all factory identification tags, nameplates, model and serial numbers, stenciling, etc.,
during construction and replace if damaged.
C.
Label Spacing and Extent:
1.19
1.
On straight run of pipes: Above suspended ceilings space labels approximately 10 feet on
center; elsewhere, 20 feet on center.
2.
Wherever a pipe enters or leaves a room or building.
3.
At change of direction.
4.
At main valves and control valves (not equipment valves).
5.
At manifolds.
6.
On risers, just above and below floors.
VALVE TAGS:
A.
2" X 3" laminated plastic with 1/2" numbers engraved at top, leaving space for further engraving
by others. Secure tags with chains to valve yoke or stem, not handles.
B.
Valve tag colors:

1.
Fire Protection: White tags with red numbers.
C.
Valve tag locations: At all valves on mains, risers and branches.
D.
Valve tag numbers: Starting with Number 1, number tags in sequence from the lowest point to
the highest point in the building. In existing buildings extend existing sequences.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

21 0500 - 6
1.20
A.
1.21
VALVE CHARTS:
In existing buildings include existing valves in the charts of new valves.
TESTS, CLEANING & ADJUSTMENTS:
A.
All tests shall be witnessed by the Architect in addition to authorities having jurisdiction. A
minimum of 72 hour notice is required prior to performance of test.
B.
After systems have been installed complete, adjust and test systems for proper operation.
C.
Perform all tests as required by local codes. Contractor shall furnish testing equipment.
D.
If local codes are more stringent than the following, local codes shall govern.
1.22
WARRANTY & INSTRUCTIONS:
A.
See General Conditions - One-Year Warranty.
B.
Contractor shall and hereby does warrant all materials, workmanship and equipment furnished
and installed by him to be free from defects for a period of one year after date of substantial
completion of the Contract. Should any defects in material, workmanship, or equipment be made
known to Contractor within the one-year warranty period, Contractor shall replace such
materials, workmanship, or equipment without charge.
C.
After completion of the work, Contractor shall operate the equipment which he installs for a
period of (10) working days, as a test of satisfactory operating conditions. During this time,
Contractor shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the correct operation of the
equipment.
1.23
A.
1.24
A.
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT:
Prior to the issuance of a certificate for final payment, submit to Architect and obtain his approval
of the following:
1.
Record drawings - Fire protection systems: CAD plots or mylar sepia reproducibles.
2.
Equipment Submittal Data (3).
3.
Equipment warranty dates and guarantees (3)
4.
List of Owner's Personnel who have received maintenance instructions.
5.
Test results of fire protection systems and names of those witnessing test. (See Section
214000 and NFPA 25 for testing requirements.)
6.
Install valve charts in Mechanical Rooms.
TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL:

The General Contractor shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and
ultimately to ensure that training is completed.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

21 0500 - 7
B.
C.
The Engineer shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of
the training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment.
1.
The Fire Protection Engineer shall determine the special needs and areas where training
will be most valuable. The Owner and Engineer shall decide how rigorous the training
should be for each piece of commissioned equipment. The Fire Protection Engineer shall
communicate the results to the Subs and vendors who have training responsibilities.
2.
Each Sub and vendor responsible for training shall submit a written training plan to the
Fire Protection Engineer for review and approval prior to training. The plan will cover the
following elements:
a.
Equipment (included in training)
b.
Intended audience
c.
Location of training
d.
Objectives
e.
Subjects covered (description, duration of discussion, special methods, etc.)
f.
Duration of training on each subject
g.
Instructor for each subject
h.
Methods (classroom lecture, video, site walk-through, actual operational

demonstrations, written handouts, etc.)
i.
Instructor and qualifications
3.
The General Contractor shall develop an overall training plan and shall coordinate and
schedule, with the Subcontractors and other consultants, the overall training for the
commissioned systems. The Engineer will recommend approval of the training to the
Owner upon satisfactory completion using a standard approval form. The Owner and
Contractors sign the approval form.
4.
Video taping of the training sessions will be provided at the Owners request.
Fire Protection Contractor. The Fire Protection Contractor shall have the following training
responsibilities:
1.
Provide the Fire Protection Engineer and Owner with a training plan two weeks before the
planned training.
2.
Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the
understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of
equipment.
3.
Training shall normally start with classroom sessions followed by hands-on training on
each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including
startup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc.
4.
The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and
maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for
reference.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

21 0500 - 8
5.
Training shall include:

a.
Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns.
b.
Discussion of warranties and guarantees.
c.
Common troubleshooting problems and solutions.
d.
Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
6.
The Fire Protection contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, and
function of any newly added valves and sprinklers.
7.
Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the
Owner.
8.
Minimum Duration of Training. The Fire Protection contractor shall provide training on
each piece of equipment according to the following schedule.
Hours
System
1
1
Piping Systems
Fire Sprinklers
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

21 0500 - 9
SECTION 21 1000
MATERIALS AND METHODS FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE:
A.
Section 210500 - "General Provisions Fire Suppression" shall apply to and become part of this
Section.
PART 2 - MATERIALS: (All pipe, fittings and valves shall be manufactured in the United States of
America)
2.1
PIPE HANGERS:
A.
General: Pipe hangers, Anvil, PHD, Michigan Hanger, B-Line or Elcen. Anvil figure numbers are
given for reference.
B.
Equip pipe hangers with vibration isolators as specified under Vibration Isolators.
C.
Pipe hangers for lines 3" and smaller: adjustable wrought ring hangers, Anvil Fig. 97 or 69 or
wrought clevis hangers.
D.
Pipe hangers for piping 4" and larger: adjustable wrought clevis hangers.
E.
Parallel piping graded in same direction may be grouped on trapezes. Trapezes for line 4" and
smaller, Unistrut P2000 channel, or equal, with rods sized as specified below for largest pipe on
trapeze. Guide lines on (but not anchor to) trapezes using Unistrut Series P1100 clamps.
Trapezes shall not exceed 3' in length. Space lines to allow at least 3" clear between adjacent
pipe or pipe covering and between pipes or pipe covering and rods. Space trapezes as specified
for pipe hangers based upon smallest size of pipe on trapeze.
F.
Provide riser clamps on pipe risers on each floor.
G.
Beam Clamps: Anvil Fig. 92.
H.
Inserts for hangers in concrete structures: Underwriter's listed cast iron inserts. Anvil Fig. 282.
I.
For fasteners in existing concrete structures use drilled in expansion anchors with load rating at
least 150% of pipe hanger rating (powder driven anchors are not acceptable).
J.
Size rods for pipe hangers per NFPA 13, Table 9.1.2.1.
K.
Space pipe hangers per NFPA 13, Table 9.2.2.1(a).
2.2
GAUGES:
A.
Install 4-1/2" dial pressure gauges per NFPA 13. Gauges shall have bronze or stainless steel
bourdon tubes, 316 stainless steel movement, aluminum or polypropylene solid front cases,
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

21 1000 - 1
adjustable micrometer pointer and accuracy Grade 2A not less than 1/2% of full scale over the
entire range, without mounting flange. Gauges shall be Ashcroft 1279, Marsh Series P01,
Trerice 450-B, Weksler AA44-2 or U.S. Gauge 1980L with minimum bourdon tube diameter of
3". Provide ball valves for all pressure gauges. Provide siphons for steam gauges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPE INSTALLATION:
A.
Cut pipe square and ream full size after cutting. Clean pipe. Make threaded joints with Teflon
tape. Do not spring pipe into place.
B.
Install chrome plated floor and ceiling plates on pipe passing through finished surfaces in
finished spaces.
C.
Install drains from low points and inspector's test in fire protection piping to approved points,
whether shown or not.
D.
Run piping concealed, except where specifically shown or specified to be exposed. Plumb all
vertical lines and run mains parallel to building walls unless specifically shown otherwise.
E.
Provide and install through-penetration firestop systems for piping and conduit penetrations
through the following fire-resistance-rated assemblies:
1.
Roofs.
2.
Floors.
3.
Walls and partitions.
4.
Smoke barriers.
5.
Construction enclosing compartmentalized areas.
F.
The firestop systems provided shall resist the spread of fire, resist the passage of smoke and
other gases.
G.
Provide U.L. classified through-penetration firestop system for each penetration in accordance
with manufacturers guidelines.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

21 1000 - 2
SECTION 21 4000
FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE:
A.
Section 210500 - "General Provisions - Fire Suppression" and Section 211000 - "Materials and
Methods - Fire Suppression" shall apply to and become part of this Section.
B.
It is the Contractors responsibility to verify flow test data prior to ordering any equipment. If
results do not meet demand, he is to notify the Architect prior to preparing shop drawings.
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS:
A.
Prepare hydraulic calculations and a working shop drawing layout to show precise locations and
elevations of sprinkler heads and piping with sizes indicated. Coordinate location of piping and
sprinkler heads with other work, including piping, ducts, diffusers and lighting fixture layout.
When submitted to Architect, drawings and calculations shall bear the stamps of approval from
Owner's Underwriter and local Fire Marshal's office.
B.
Prepare shop drawings in two phases:

1.
Phase I: Submit a reflected ceiling plan indicating ceiling grid, with lights, diffusers, etc.,
and a sprinkler head layout (6 copies).
2.
Phase II: Submit final submittal with pipe, sizes, calculations and underwriter approval (6
copies).
Note: Do not prepare Phase II until Phase I is approved. Do not fabricate any pipe until
Phase II shop drawings are approved.
C.
1.3
State on drawings: Hose threads match the City of Auburn Fire Department Equipment.
CODES:
A.
1.4
Provide all equipment, piping, valves, switches and complete operating system to standard of
NFPA 13 in compliance with local, county and state authorities, Auburn University Design and
Construction Standards, Owner's Underwriter, and these Specifications.
SERVICE:
A.
Connect to existing sprinkler supply piping as needed in order to provide adequate flow for new
sprinklers.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
FIRE PROTECTION
21 4000 - 1
1.5
HYDROSTATIC TESTING:
A.
Fire protection piping tests: Test in accordance with NFPA 13. Architect, Owner's Underwriters
and local Fire Marshal shall witness tests. Provide certificate of inspection to the Architect
including the names of those witnessing the test.
B.
In addition to the standard hydrostatic test, all dry piped systems shall require an air pressure
leakage test at 40 psi to be conducted for 24 hours. Any leakage that results in a loss of
pressure shall be corrected prior to performing the hydrostatic test.
C.
On completion of installation test all piping and attached appurtenances subjected to system
working pressure at 200 psi or 50 psi in excess of the system working pressure, whichever is
greater, the system shall maintain that pressure for 2 hours. Pressure loss shall be determined
by a drop in gauge pressure or visual leakage. The test pressure shall be read from one of the
following, located at the lowest elevation of the system or the portion of the system being tested:
1.
A gauge located at one of the hydrant outlets
2.
A gauge located at the lowest point where no hydrants are provided
D.
To reduce the possibility of serious water damage in case of a break, pressure can be
maintained by a small pump, the main controlling gate meanwhile being kept shut during the
test.
E.
Hydrostatic tests should be made before the joints are covered so that any leaks can be readily
detected.
F.
The test procedure is as follows: Apply additional pressure, by temporary pump or compressed
air connection. The water pressure is to be increased in 50 psi increments until the test pressure
described above is attained. After each increase in pressure, observations are to be made of the
stability of the joints. These observations are to include such items as protrusion or extrusion of
the gasket, leakage, or other factors likely to affect the continued use of a pipe in service. During
the test, the pressure is not to be increased to the next increment until the joint has become
stable. This applies particularly to movement of the gasket. After the pressure has been
increased to the required maximum value and held for 1 hour, the pressure is to be decreased
to 0 psi while observations are made for leakage. The pressure is again to be slowly increased
to the value specified above and held for 1 more hour while observations are made for leakage.
G.
Modifications affecting 20 or fewer sprinklers shall not require testing in excess of system
working pressure.
H.
Where addition or modification is made to an existing system affecting more than 20 sprinklers,
the new portion shall be isolated and tested at not less than 200 psi for 2 hours.
I.
Modifications that cannot be isolated, such as relocated drops, shall not require testing in excess
of system working pressure.
J.
Loss shall be determined by a drop in gauge pressure or visual leakage.
K.
The test pressure shall be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point of the system or
portion being tested.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
FIRE PROTECTION
21 4000 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL:
A.
2.2
Refer to Electrical Drawings and Specifications for alarms, wiring of supervisory switches and
related equipment.
FIRE PROTECTION PIPING:

A.
System shall comply with NFPA 13.
B.
All fire protection piping within building: black steel. All fire protection piping outside building:
ductile iron. All fire protection piping above ground on outside of building: galvanized.
C.
Black steel pipe: schedule 40, ASTM A-53, A-106 or A-135. Fittings on piping 2 and smaller
black malleable iron 175 lb., screwed ANSI B 16.4 or B 16.3; piping fittings 2-1/2 and larger,
welded fittings, ANSI B 16.9 or Victaulic, Anvil or Gustin Bacon fittings for roll grooved pipe,
ASTM A-47. Where allowed by NFPA 13 and Owners Underwriter, schedule 10 black steel
pipe with roll groove may be substituted.
D.
Joints on black steel screwed piping: Make up with Teflon tape applied to male threads.
E.
Joints on black steel welded piping: Comply with ANSI standard. B 16.9 and B 16.25.
F.
Joints on black steel grooved piping: Victaulic, Anvil or Gustin Bacon couplings, ASTM-A-47.
Note: Victaulic #920 or #922 Mechanical Ts are approved for use only where connections to
existing systems are required. All joints must be cut or roll grooved.
2.3
PIPE HANGERS:
A.
given for reference.
B.
Pipe hangers for lines 8" and smaller: Anvil Fig. 69.
C.
Trapezes where required to bridge between structural members, Unistrut P2000 channel, or
equal, with rods sized as specified below for largest pipe on trapeze.
D.
Provide riser clamps on pipe risers on each floor.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Size rods for pipe hangers not smaller than the following: 3/8" rods for pipe thru 3", 1/2" rods for
4", 5", 6" and 8", 5/8" rods for pipe 10" and larger.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
FIRE PROTECTION
21 4000 - 3
I.
2.4
Pipe hanger spacing for screwed, cut or roll groove joint and welded piping in strict accord with
NFPA 13. Install additional hangers at change of direction, valve clusters, and at ends of branch
lines.
FIRE PROTECTION VALVES:

A.
Gate valves 2" and smaller: all bronze, 175 psig WP, UL listed, OS&Y, solid disc, Stockham
B-133, Nibco T-104-0, Milwaukee Valve BB-SC100.
B.
Gate valve 2 1/2" and larger: iron body, bronze trim, flanged, 175 psig WP, UL listed, OS&Y,
Stockham G-634, American Darling 55, Kennedy 68, Mueller A2073-6, Nibco F-607-0.
C.
Butterfly Valves: Central Figure 570 or 580 complete with supervisory switch for indoor or
waterproof on exterior UL/FM approved.
D.
Check valves: iron body, bronze trim, 175 psig WP, UL listed, Stockham G-939, American Flow
Control 50-SC, Kennedy 126, Mueller A2120-6, Nibco F-908-B.
2.5
SPRINKLER WATER FLOW INDICATOR AND SUPERVISORY SWITCHES:

A.
Underwriter approved paddle switch type water flow indicator, 120/1/60, two single pole, double
throw contacts, one set for remote alarm, one set for alarm bell, complete with supervised cover
on device. Automatic, Viking, or Anvil.
B.
Supervisory switches, equal to Notifier Company Model NGV or SGV or Potter OSYSU-1 or -2
with NEMA 6P enclosure shall be used where subject to any condition where water is present,
such as, in exterior vaults, complete with supervised cover on device. Potter waterproof
switches must be used where installed outside building. All valves shall be supervised open.
Provide with 2 sets of single pole double throw contacts.
2.6
SPRINKLER HEADS:
A.
Sprinkler heads shall be (Quick Response) commercial type, U.L. listed by Reliable, Victaulic,
Tyco, Viking, Globe or approved equal. Sprinkler heads shall be centered both directions in
ceiling tile.
B.
Provide quick response brass upright sprinklers in areas without ceilings.
C.
Provide quick response concealed style pendent sprinklers with white cover plates in areas with
ceilings.
D.
Where sidewall sprinklers are used provide quick response type.
E.
Existing pipe and fittings may be reused but all sprinklers within the contract limits shall be new
and new sprinklers shall be quick response type. Contractor to verify that existing sprinkler in
the same compartment with the new work are quick response type. Where sprinklers are found
to be standard response replace with quick response type sprinklers. Sprinklers to match
existing in appearance, i.e. color and concealment.
F.
Submit sample of any proposed equivalents in sprinklers prior to bid date. See Substitutions
Section.
G.
Sprinklers subject to mechanical injury shall be protected with listed guards.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
FIRE PROTECTION
21 4000 - 4
2.7
SPARE HEADS:
A.
2.8
Provide heads in cabinet per NFPA 13. Provide one sprinkler wrench for each type head.
TEMPORARY VALVES:
A.
Extend fire standpipes up with building construction and provide on each floor Fire Department
valves as required.
B.
Provide temporary valves where required to minimize the time sprinklers outside of renovation
area are out of service.
2.9
EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Where Croker/Standard is listed above Potter/Roemer, Elkhart, Guardian or Sierra may be

utilized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING:
A.
Provide drain piping to approved locations for all low points. Provide inspectors test piping to the
building exterior at approved locations.
B.
Install using tradesmen certified in sprinkler pipe and system installations.
C.
Fire protection piping may be factory cut to lengths, but field modifications will be required to
coordinate with other trades.
3.2
PERIODIC INSPECTION:
A.
Make two periodic inspections within the first year after completion and acceptance of the work.
Furnish a complete written report of each inspection to the Architect and the Underwriter.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
FIRE PROTECTION
21 4000 - 5
SECTION 22 0500
GENERAL PROVISIONS PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE:
A.
Provisions of this Section apply to all Plumbing work.
B.
C.
Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for the completion of all
Plumbing work shown or specified, complete and ready for operation, consisting in general of
the following: New faucets and fixtures as shown on drawings.
D.
the installation of the Plumbing work. Obtain and pay for inspections required by laws,
ordinances, rules, regulations or public authority having jurisdiction. Obtain and pay for
certificates of such inspections, and file such certificates with Owner.
E.
1.2
DRAWINGS:
A.
Plumbing Drawings are diagrammatic and subject to requirements of Architectural Drawings and
conditions existing in the field. Plumbing Drawings indicate generally the location of components
and are not intended to show all fittings or all details of the work.
B.
conditions. DO NOT scale Plumbing drawings for location of system components.
C.
D.
Drawings and specifications are complimentary. Work shown or specified in one is binding as if
shown or specified in both. Any discrepancies between the drawings and specifications shall be
brought to the attention of the Consultant for clarification during the bidding period. No allowance
shall be subsequently made to the Contractor by reason of his failure to have brought said
discrepancies to the attention of the Consultant during the bidding period or by reason of any error
on the Contractors part.
E.
Contractor for plumbing work is responsible for coordinating with all trades.
1.3

A.
1.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING

22 0500 - 1
1.4
2.
3.
4.
5.
Local Plumbing Code (International Plumbing Code if no local code)
A.
1.5
The Plumbing Subcontractor shall meet the following qualifications:

1.
He shall have been in business as a Plumbing contractor for at least 3 years prior to the
date of opening bids.
2.
He shall have a current Master Plumber's Certificate of competency issued by the State of
Alabama and the City and County in which work occurs.
3.
He shall have a satisfactory experience record with Plumbing installations of character

and scope comparable with this project.

A.
1.6
WORKMANSHIP:
A.
1.7
Do all work in a neat and first-class manner. Remove and replace work not done in such
manner as directed by the Architect.
COOPERATION:
A.
1.8
other work.
VISITING SITE:
A.
1.9
Visit site and become familiar with location and various conditions affecting work prior to bid. No
additional allowance will be granted because of lack of knowledge of such conditions. No
consideration shall be given to future claims due to existing conditions. Any discrepancies or
interferences shall be reported immediately to the Architect/Consultant.
MATERIALS:
A.
Unless otherwise noted, provide new, standard, first-grade materials throughout.
B.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

22 0500 - 2
C.
drawings, cuts, performance data, and deviation from the specification and any other information
necessary for evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment or
other Work that incorporation of the equivalent may require shall be included. The burden of
proof of the merit of the proposed equivalent is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of
approval or disapproval of a proposed equivalent is final.
D.
MANNER.
E.
F.
there from shall be allowed except with Architect's written approval. Submit PDF format files as
noted below for approval. Provide 3 hard copy sets of approved data for project close-out.
Provide a PDF format file on CD-ROM of the equipment, materials, etc. Provide a separate
PDF format file for each type of material and equipment. Provide a PDF format file on CD ROM
of the approved submittal data for each item of equipment or material as part of the close-out
documents. Provide a minimum of one PDF file for each type of equipment or material and
index and title each file with the names of the equipment or material.
G.
1.10
RECORD DRAWINGS:
A.
When work starts the Contractor shall furnish two complete sets of white prints of the approved
drawings for the Plumbing drawings. All corrections, variations, and deviations, including those
required by change orders, if any, shall be recorded in colored ink or colored pencil at the end of
each working day on these drawings. The contactor shall include the contract drawings
schedules, details, sections, etc. marked as noted above to indicate changes. The marked
prints shall be available at all times for the Architect's inspection.
B.
1.
2.
drawings.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

22 0500 - 3
C.
1.11
Include the contract drawings equipment schedules, details, sections, and controls edited to
show actual completed conditions. When record drawings are complete, provide 2 sets of bond
prints.
A.
During construction, protect equipment from damage or deterioration.
B.
When installation is complete, clean equipment.
1.12
A.
B.
such clearance. Provide space at equipment power and control panels as required by local
codes.
C.

D.
All equipment shall be firmly fastened in place.
1.13
A.
1.14
A.
1.15
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS:
Provide supports for piping and equipment.

Cut, patch and repair as required to accomplish Plumbing Work and finish to match adjacent
work. Architect's approval required before cutting any part where strength or appearance of
finished work is involved.
A.
Make connections to existing systems only at time authorized, in writing, by Owner.
B.
Take existing systems and/or equipment out of service only at times authorized in writing by Owner.
C.
Drain existing systems and fill, vent, and put existing systems into operation after connections have
been made.
D.
Repair existing insulation at points of connection to existing work.
1.16
A.
SLEEVES:
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

22 0500 - 4
B.
For pipe passing through floors outside fire rated chases and fire rated walls and partitions,
Refer to Through-Penetration Firestop Systems where included in the contract documents.
Otherwise, seal between sleeve and pipe or pipe covering with 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25WB
caulk, Flamestop V, Specified Technologies, Inc. "Spec Seal Sealant", Rectorseal Corp.
Metacaulk 950 or Hilti FSONE bearing UL listing for actual conditions of installation, thickness
and application in strict accord with UL reference for each type installation. Any equivalents
must meet the 10 day prior approval provision and must show UL approval for all conditions,
bare pipe, insulated pipe, etc. For plastic piping material submittal must show UL approval for
each application and if caulk comes in direct contact with pipe, it must be compatible and not
injurious to the pipe.
C.
In existing construction, grout sleeves firmly in place.
D.
1.17
A.
1.18
PAINTING:
Refinish equipment damaged during construction to new condition.
A.
Piping identification shall comply with the latest version of Auburn Universitys Design and
Construction Standards.
B.
Show pipe contents and direction of flow. Markers shall be taped in place. Markers shall be
equal to Craftmark, Brady, Seton or Brimar.
C.
D.
1.19
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
ACCESS DOORS:
Furnish and install access doors for valves, fire dampers, dampers, controls, air vents, and other
items located above non-liftout ceilings or behind partitions or walls. Doors in non-fire rated walls
and ceilings: 16-gauge steel with hinges and screwdriver latches. Doors in fire rated walls and
ceilings: UL labeled with fire rating equal to fire rating of wall or ceiling. Provide door styles
compatible with adjoining surfaces as selected by Architect. Size doors to permit removal of
equipment and/or maintenance. Doors: Bar-Co, Nystrom, Williams Bros., or equal.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

22 0500 - 5
1.20
A.
All tests shall be witnessed by the Architect in addition to authorities having jurisdiction. A minimum
of 72 hour notice is required prior to performance of test.
B.
After systems have been installed complete, adjust and test systems for proper operation and
correct all noise or vibration conditions. Perform all tests as required by local codes. Contractor shall
furnish testing equipment. All piping pressure tests shall be hydrostatic tests.
C.
D.
Sanitary System:
1.
E.
1.21
Test piping by stopping lower outlets and filling with water to 10' hydrostatic head. Stop
leaks and repeat test until watertight. All joints shall be exposed throughout test.
Domestic water piping: Test by applying pressure (by temporary pump or compressed air
connection) to total hydrostatic pressure 1-1/2 times street pressure but not less than 150 psig for
not less than 4 hours. Immediately and completely stop all leaks. On completion of roughing-in, cap
all outlets, make connections with house supply line, and put under full water pressure. After testing,
leave general pressure on until ready to install fixture (except when necessary to drain to avoid
freezing during construction). After completion of all tests, repairs and installation of fixtures, flush all
domestic hot and cold water piping with water to remove sediment and scale and then disinfect.
Disinfect piping with hypochlorite solution of chlorine or compressed chlorine gas applied through an
approved chlorinator. Operate valves and faucets several times to insure the chlorine reaches all
parts of the system. Feed water and chlorination agent into the system at rates that will provide a
residual chlorine content of not less than 50 ppm after a retention period of 6 hours. Upon
completion of treatment, flush treated water from each system until the water supply is satisfactory
to the public health authority having jurisdiction. Provide Architect a certificate of compliance from
the local Health Department.
A.
B.
C.
Provide 3 sets of manufacturer's operating and maintenance manuals and parts lists for all
equipment and materials furnished. Provide a maintenance schedule listing routine maintenance
operations and suggested frequency thereof. Include all warranty dates on equipment and
guarantees. Bind above items in loose-leaf 3-ring D binders with tab for each class of
equipment. Provide a PDF format file on CD ROM of the O&M data for each item of equipment
or material as part of the close-out documents. Provide a minimum of one file per type of
equipment or material and index and title the file with the name of the equipment or material.
D.
Make available to the Owner, without additional cost, service and adjustment of the equipment
for the guarantee period.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

22 0500 - 6
1.22
A.
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT:
Prior to the issuance of a certificate for final payment, submit to Architect and obtain his
approval of the following:
1.
Record drawings piping: Two sets of bond prints.
2.
3.
Equipment operating and maintenance manuals with CD ROM of PDF files (3).
4.
Maintenance schedule (3).
5.
Equipment warranty dates and guarantees (3).
6.
Certification of disinfection of domestic water lines.
7.
8.
Include with insulation material submittal letters from the insulation material manufacturer
certifying that the insulation material does not contain asbestos in any shape, form or
quantity.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

22 0500 - 7
SECTION 22 1000
MATERIALS AND METHODS PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE:
A.
Section 220500 - "General Provisions - Plumbing" shall apply to and become part of this
Section.
PART 2 - MATERIALS: All pipe, fittings and valves shall be manufactured in the United States of America
2.1
ACID WASTE PIPING SYSTEM:

A.
All acid waste and vent piping: acid-resistant pipe.
B.
Acid waste and vent piping: CPVC pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM F2618, schedule 40,
equal to Charlotte Chem Drain. One step solvent cement shall be specially formulated for
chemical waste applications and conform to ASTM F493.
C.
Where installed in return air plenums, use UL approved PVDF waste and vent piping with
mechanical joint.
D.
Connect to existing acid vent piping where shown.
E.
Connect to existing acid waste piping where shown.
2.2
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING:

A.
Domestic Water piping within building: copper tube.
B.
Copper tube, ASTM B-88, copper water tube, type "L" hard temper inside building. Fittings: wrought
copper water tube fittings, ANSI B 16.18 or B 16.22.
C.
Joints on copper tube: soldered as recommended by manufacturer, using 95-5 solder. Lead free
solder, flux, etc. is required.
D.
Connect to existing water lines. Patch insulation at point of new connection to match existing.
E.
Provide temporary construction water at site as required.
2.3
PLUMBING VALVES:
A.
Supply water piping valves as specified:

1.
Ball valves: (2" and smaller) all bronze, 600 psig WOG, 150 psig WSP, chrome plated
brass ball, full port, Teflon seats, stem packing seal and thrust washer. Watts B-6080 or
B-6081, Nibco T585-70 or S-585-70, Apollo 77-100 threaded end or solder end,
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING

22 1000 - 1
Stockham Series 255 or Milwaukee, full port 834 solder end. Provide extension stem
capable of clearing 2" insulation, with memory stop, when operated will not disturb vapor
seal of insulation.
2.4
PIPE HANGERS:
A.
given for reference. Provide copper clad or plastic coated hangers on bare copper lines.
B.
Equip pipe hangers with vibration isolators as specified under Vibration Isolators.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Size rods for pipe hangers not smaller than the following: 3/8" rods for pipe up to 2".
I.
Support plumbing water piping within stud partitions with brackets as manufactured by P&M
Bracket Company, Sumner Products, B-Line Ruff-in or Holdrite. Wire is expressly prohibited.
Support horizontal plumbing soil and waste piping within stud partitions with Unistrut anchored to
floor. Provide fire treated wood backing where required to anchor fixtures and brass securely.
J.
Space pipe hangers at maximum: 5' intervals for cast iron pipe. Pipe hanger spacing for
screwed, solder joint and welded piping: 1/2" and 3/4", 6 ft.; 1" to 1-1/4", 8 ft.; 1-1/2" to 2-1/2", 10
ft.; 3 and over, 12 ft. Install additional hangers at change of direction and valve clusters.
K.
Install pipe hangers on insulated pipe over pipe covering. Provide factory fabricated insulated
pipe shields equal to Pipe Shields, Inc. "Thermal Hanger Shields" or Tru-Balance insulated
saddles at hangers. Provide shield insulation of rigid calcium silicate indoors or rigid Perlite
Silicate outdoors, the same thickness as adjacent pipe covering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPE INSTALLATION:
A.
B.
Slope Sanitary Drain Lines:

1.
Less than 3: minimum 1/4 per 1.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

22 1000 - 2
C.
Install piping to allow for expansion. Make connections to plumbing fixtures and all equipment to
eliminate undue strains in piping and equipment. Furnish necessary fittings and bends to avoid
springing of pipes during assembly.
D.
Install chrome plated floor and ceiling plates on pipe passing through finished surfaces in
finished spaces.
E.
Make horizontal water line size reductions using eccentric reducers (tops flat).
F.
Install 3/4" ball valve drains with hose adaptors at low points of water piping and at bases of all
risers (where shown provide larger drains). Provide screwed caps with chains on hose
adaptors.
G.
Wherever ferrous pipes or tanks and copper tubing connect, provide dielectric insulating unions
or couplings, equal to Victaulic style 47, "V-line" insulating couplings as manufactured by
Lochinvar, thread to thread or CTS fabrication flange adaptors for flange connections.
H.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF VALVES:
A.
Provide shut-off valves in supply and return connections to each item of equipment. Locate
valves to isolate each item to facilitate maintenance and/or removal.
B.
Provide sweat to screw adaptors where required.
C.
Install with valve stems upright or horizontal.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

22 1000 - 3
SECTION 22 1500
THERMAL AND ACOUSTICAL INSULATION FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0
GENERAL:
A.
1.1
All insulation shall be installed by an insulation contractor in business a minimum of 3 years as

an insulation contractor and has completed projects similar in scope to this project. Submit
insulation contractor qualifications.
SCOPE:
A.
Section 220500 - General Provisions Plumbing shall apply to and become part of this
Section.
B.
Repair existing insulation at points of connection and/or alterations to existing work.
C.
Exposed is defined as: Exposed to view when construction is complete. (Items which are not
exposed are concealed.)
D.
The use of any material containing asbestos is strictly prohibited.
E.
Include with insulation material submittal letters from the insulation material manufacturer
certifying that the insulation material does not contain asbestos in any shape, form or quantity.
1.2
INSULATION:
A.
Comply with NFPA 90A.
B.
Pipe hanger shields are specified in Section 221000 - Materials and Methods - Plumbing.
C.
Use insulation and adhesives with Underwriter's Laboratories and ASTM E-84 flame spread
rating not over 25 without evidence of continued progressive combustion, and smoke developed
rating not exceeding:
1.
50 for pipe covering located in air ducts, plenum or casings.
2.
150 for all other pipe and equipment insulation.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1
FIBERGLASS PIPE COVERING:

A.
Snap-on glass fiber insulation minimum density 5#/cu. ft. maximum thermal conductivity at 75F
mean temperature 0.25 BTU/(hr)(sq. ft.)(F/in) with UL rated vinyl coated and embossed vapor
barrier laminate of aluminum foil and kraft reinforced with glass fiber yarns (ASJ).
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
THERMAL & ACOUSTICAL INSULATION FOR

PLUMBING SYSTEMS
22 1500 - 1
B.
For all lines seal jacket with self sealing lap. Butt adjoining sections of insulation tightly and seal
with self-adhering butt joint strips.
C.
Cover fittings to thickness of adjacent covering with factory pre-molded fitting covers. Cover
flanged valve bodies and flanged unions. Do not cover screwed unions on hot lines. Finish
concealed fittings with a skim-coat of mastic and when mastic is dry, fitting shall be covered with
glass fab and vinyl acrylic mastic unless otherwise noted below. Zeston type fitting covers may
be substituted for glass fab and final coat of mastic on concealed fittings provided fire and
smoke ratings are met. Finish fittings exposed in equipment rooms, boiler room, and in finished
spaces with vinyl acrylic mastic over glass fab over mastic.
D.
At contractor's option, concealed tees may be insulated with field fabricated tee covers
consisting of straight pipe covering on run of tee with notch at branch together with pipe covering
on branch contoured to fit notch. Glass fab over skim coat of mastic shall be applied around
main, lapping contoured joint at branch by 2" minimum for the full 360 of joint. Cover entire
fitting covering with vinyl-acrylic mastic over glass fab, 1/8" thick (dry) coat. Submit sample of
fabricated tee covering to Architect for approval before work is begun.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1
PLUMBING PIPING:
A.
Cold water piping, interior, above grade: Fiberglass pipe covering, 1" thick, except Zeston fitting
covers are excluded.
B.
Hot water piping, interior, above grade: Fiberglass pipe covering, 1" thick.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
THERMAL & ACOUSTICAL INSULATION FOR

PLUMBING SYSTEMS
22 1500 - 2
SECTION 22 2000
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE:
A.
Section 220500 - "General Provisions - Plumbing" and Section 221000 - "Materials and Methods
- Plumbing" shall apply to and become part of this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CLEANOUTS:
A.
Furnish and install cleanouts where indicated on drawings and at all 90-degree bends, angles,
upper terminals and not over 50' apart on straight runs. All cleanouts on cast iron piping to have
bronze countersunk rectangular tapered slotted plugs. PVC waste piping cleanouts shall be
standard of piping system used. Flush-with-floor cleanout access covers shall have non-skid
covers. All wall cleanout access covers shall have polished satin finish. All cleanouts shall be full
size of pipe, 8" and less.
B.
Exposed Cleanouts: Cast brass plug type, J.R. Smith 4470T.
C.
Wall type cleanout plug and access covers, J.R. Smith 4472T. Cleanout plug must be within 1"
of finish wall and must be tapped for access cover. On PVC plastic waste pipe in wall: Cleanout
access cover J.R. Smith 4710.
D.
Floor type cleanout access covers: J.R. Smith 4239L/LXH-NB. Plug must be within 3" of finished
floor. Provide 4193L/LXH-NB covers where installed in terrazzo floors. Grout cleanout below
access cover to seal watertight.
E.
Coordinate the exact location of all cleanouts with the Architect.
2.2
PLUMBING FIXTURES:
A.
Unless otherwise specified, all fixtures complete as catalogued, white color, exposed metal trim
chromium plated.
B.
Clean all fixtures to a clean and sanitary condition.
C.
Fixtures and brass shall be securely anchored.
D.
Seal wall hung fixtures at wall with clear silicone sealant.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

22 2000 - 1
E.
All items complete as catalogued as follows:

P-1 Scrub Sink: Elkay EWS2520SBMC, 14 gauge 304 stainless steel, 6 backsplash, complete
with wall hanger and stainless steel brackets and Elkay LK722B battery sensor faucet,
mechanical mixing valve. Elkay LK18B strainer. McGuire 165 supplies with stops and 8912 Ptrap.
2.3
EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Where Smith is listed above, Josam, Watts, Zurn or Wade may be utilized.
B.
Where Elkay sinks are listed above, Just may be utilized.
C.
Where Elkay faucet is listed above, T&S Brass, Chicago Brass, Cambridge or Zurn may be
utilized.
D.
Where McGuire is listed above, the equal of Zurn, Watts or EBC may be utilized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS:
3.1
A.
Install all plumbing equipment and fixtures as recommended by the manufacturers

recommendations.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

22 2000 - 2
SECTION 23 0500
GENERAL PROVISIONS HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE:
A.
Provisions of this Section apply to all Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC),
Instrumentation & Controls, and Test and Balance work.
B.
C.
Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for the completion of all HVAC
work shown or specified, complete and ready for operation, consisting in general of the
following: Modify HVAC system for lab renovation.
D.
the installation of the HVAC work. Obtain and pay for inspections required by laws, ordinances,
rules, regulations or public authority having jurisdiction. Obtain and pay for certificates of such
inspections, and file such certificates with Owner.
E.
Permitting is required for non-contact heating water discharged to surface waters.

The State Contact:
Alabama Department of Environmental Management
Attn: Water Division
Post Office Box 301463
Montgomery, Alabama 36130-1463
Telephone Number: (334) 271-7823
Fax Number: (334) 279-3051
E-Mail: H2omail@adem.state.al.us
F.
1.2
USE OF BUILDING SYSTEMS FOR TEMPORARY HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING DURING

CONSTRUCTION:
A.
B.
Building HVAC systems shall not be used during construction unless the following conditions are
met:
1.
All return air openings shall have temporary filter media installed over inlet side of
openings and secured air tight there-to.
2.
All safety controls shall be in operation.
Contractor shall turn system over to Owner in condition equal to that which would have occurred
if the systems had not been used during construction.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC

23 0500 - 1
1.3
DRAWINGS:
A.
HVAC Drawings are diagrammatic and subject to requirements of Architectural Drawings and
conditions existing in the field. HVAC Drawings indicate generally the location of components
and are not intended to show all fittings or all details of the work.
B.
conditions. DO NOT scale HVAC drawings for location of system components.
C.
D.
DO NOT scale drawings to locate ceiling diffusers. COORDINATE with lighting and ceiling grids.
Contractor for HVAC work is responsible for coordinating with all trades.
E.
Drawings and specifications are complimentary. Work shown or specified in one is binding as if
shown or specified in both. Any discrepancies between the drawings and specifications shall be
brought to the attention of the Consultant for clarification during the bidding period. No allowance
shall be subsequently made to the Contractor by reason of his failure to have brought said
discrepancies to the attention of the Consultant during the bidding period or by reason of any error
on the Contractors part.
F.
No attempt has been made to establish the required sections or splits of equipment relative to the
size of access into the space, building, etc. Contractor shall establish all said splits, sections, etc.
necessary to install equipment complete without undue disassembly of equipment or demolition of
building parts at site of work.
1.4

A.
1.
ANSI/B31.9 - Code for Building Services Piping
2.
ASHRAE 62 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
3.
4.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
5.
6.
7.
8.
Local Plumbing Code (International Plumbing Code if no local code)
9.
Local Mechanical Code (International Mechanical Code if no local code)
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 0500 - 2
1.5
A.
1.6
The HVAC Subcontractor shall meet the following qualifications:

1.
He shall have been in business as a HVAC contractor for at least 3 years prior to the date
of opening bids, and shall have held a license from the Alabama State Licensing Board
for General Contractors for at least 3 years.
2.
He shall have a satisfactory experience record with HVAC installations of character and
scope comparable with this project, and for at least 3 years prior to the date of opening
bids shall have had an established service department capable of providing service
inspection or full maintenance contracts.
3.
If the HVAC subcontractor, with the Engineer's approval, uses a sub-subcontractor to

provide another discipline that the subcontractor does not normally furnish, that subsubcontractor shall meet the same qualifications as the subcontractor.

A.
1.7
WORKMANSHIP:
A.
1.8
Do all work in a neat and first-class manner. Remove and replace work not done in such
manner as directed by the Architect.
COOPERATION:
A.
1.9
other work.
VISITING SITE:
A.
1.10
Visit site and become familiar with location and various conditions affecting work prior to bid. No
additional allowance will be granted because of lack of knowledge of such conditions. No
consideration shall be given to future claims due to existing conditions. Any discrepancies or
interferences shall be reported immediately to the Architect/Consultant.
MATERIALS:
A.
Unless otherwise noted, provide new, standard, first-grade materials throughout.
B.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 0500 - 3
C.
drawings, cuts, performance and test data, and deviation from the specification and any other
information necessary for evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials,
equipment or other Work that incorporation of the equivalent may require shall be included. The
burden of proof of the merit of the proposed equivalent is upon the proposer. The Architect's
decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed equivalent is final.
D.
MANNER.
E.
F.
there from shall be allowed except with Architect's written approval. Submit PDF format files as
noted below for approval. Provide 3 hard copy sets of approved data for project close-out.
Provide a PDF format file on CD-ROM of the equipment, materials, etc. Provide a separate
PDF format file for each type of material and equipment. Provide a PDF format file on CD ROM
of the approved submittal data for each item of equipment or material as part of the close-out
documents. Provide a minimum of one PDF file for each type of equipment or material and
index and title each file with the names of the equipment or material.
G.
All pressure vessels shall be constructed and tested in accordance with applicable ASME codes
and shall bear ASME stamps. Certificates of inspection and approval shall be submitted to
Architect.
H.
1.11
A.
SHOP DRAWINGS:
Before starting work, submit and obtain approval of detailed drawings of the following, fully
dimensioned (including elevations of ductwork and piping) and drawn to 1/4" to 1'-0" scale.
Submit a minimum of 2 sets of bond shop drawings. Piping shop drawings shall include drain
and vent locations, pipe slopes down to drains and up to vents, piping elevations, piping
connection details, and a list of piping materials. Ductwork shop drawings shall include
elevations, construction methods, re-inforcements, gauges, and access door locations and
sizes. Identify duct sections on the shop drawings as they will be identified for fabrication and
installation. Provide section drawings of locations where ducts cross or demonstrate with
elevations that ducts will fit. All shop drawings shall be produced using AutoCad and a copy of
the shop drawing files shall be provided in AutoCad 2004 format on CD-ROM disks for shop
drawing review. A CD-ROM with a copy of all approved shop drawings shall be provided for
project closeout.
1.
Ductwork (do not scale for diffuser locations, but coordinate with ceiling grids and lighting
layout). See Section "Air Distribution". Shop drawings shall include material type
(stainless steel, galvanized), finish (paint grip, etc.), actual sizes increased to allow for
internal insulation and gauges along with fabrication section notes for individual sections.
In addition, include elevations of bottom of duct above finished floor level. Show building
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 0500 - 4
sections through congested areas for coordination with structure and other disciplines.
Provide joint details, duct seal methods, insulation type, etc.
B.
1.12
2.
Complete mechanical equipment and fan room layout with equipment, supports,
ductwork, etc.
3.
Equipment piping.
Submit complete control and power wiring diagrams for approval before installing controls. See
Controls Section.
RECORD DRAWINGS:
A.
When work starts the Contractor shall furnish two complete sets of white prints of the approved
shop drawings for the heating, ventilating, air conditioning. All corrections, variations, and
deviations, including those required by change orders, if any, shall be recorded in colored ink or
colored pencil at the end of each working day on these drawings. The contactor shall include the
contract drawings schedules, details, sections, etc. marked as noted above to indicate changes.
The marked prints shall be available at all times for the Architect's inspection.
B.
1.
2.
drawings.
C.
Include the contract drawings equipment schedules, details, sections, and controls edited to
show actual completed conditions. When record drawings are complete, provide 2 sets of bond
prints, and one complete set of AutoCAD drawing files (AutoCAD 2004 format) on CD-ROM
disks.
D.
Ductwork and Control Drawings shall be a set of CAD shop drawings, up-dated to show actual
conditions at completion of work. Include the contract drawings equipment schedules and
details edited to show actual completed conditions.
E.
HVAC piping drawings may be prepared as noted above, or HVAC piping may be added to the
ductwork shop drawings noted above.
1.13
A.
1.14
A.
PROTECTION OF ROTATING PARTS:

Equip belt drives with belt guards with holes for measuring speed of fan shafts.
During construction, protect HVAC equipment and ductwork from damage or deterioration and
prevent water, dust, etc. from entering the equipment or ductwork. Cover ends of ductwork
before delivery to site with Duro-Dyne Dyn-O-Wrap. Cover all openings in equipment with DynO-Wrap until ductwork is attached.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 0500 - 5
B.
1.15
During construction, keep all stored ductwork securely covered for protection from water and
dust. Do not store directly on the floor. Immediately remove all ductwork that is wet or dirty from
the job site.
A.
B.
such clearance. Provide space at equipment power and control panels as required by local
codes.
C.

D.
All equipment shall be firmly fastened in place:
1.16
1.
Air devices connected by flexible duct shall be secured to prevent falling if grid shifts.
2.
Vibration isolators shall be secured to floors or pads and equipment shall be bolted to
isolators.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS:
A.
Provide supports for ductwork, piping and equipment.
B.
Prime coat and paint all supports located indoors.
1.17
A.
Cut, patch and repair as required to accomplish HVAC Work and finish to match adjacent work.
Architect's approval required before cutting any part where strength or appearance of finished
work is involved.
B.
Provide all motors incidental to the HVAC systems. Wiring of motors, switches and starters is
included in "Electrical Sections".
C.
Do all control wiring required for HVAC work and all power wiring required by Control Panels,
Control System, and Control Devices.
D.
Permanent drain connections from auto air vents to nearest floor drain are included in this
Section.
1.18
A.
1.19
A.
REMOVAL OF EXISTING WORK:

Dismantle and remove from premises all equipment and materials shown or indicated to be
removed. Upon removal, they shall become the Contractors property.

Make connections to existing systems only at time authorized in writing by Owner.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 0500 - 6
B.
1.20
Drain existing systems and fill, vent, and test and put existing systems into operation after
connections have been completed.
MOTORS, STARTERS & ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT:
A.
Provide electrical equipment compatible with the current shown on electrical drawings. Verify
current characteristics before ordering equipment.
B.
Should the Contractor with the Architect's approval make changes in electrical equipment from
that shown on the Electrical Drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of
required changes.
C.
Provide factory installed fuses in all equipment requiring fusing for branch circuit protection.
D.
Motors: 1750 RPM open drip-proof construction unless otherwise shown or specified. Integral
horsepower motors shall meet NEMA premium efficiency levels as stated in the latest version of
NEMA MG-1. Allis-Chalmers, General Electric, Goulds, Louis Allis, Westinghouse.
E.
Where motors are shown or scheduled to be connected to a variable frequency drive, this motor
shall be an inverter duty rated by the motor manufacturer and shall comply with NEMA MG1,
Article 3.
F.
Do not run motors until correct overload elements are installed in starters. Trading overload
elements for elements of correct size for motors actually furnished shall be included in this
Section.
G.
All starters are specified under "Electrical Section".
H.
All control panels, electrical assemblies, etc. must bear a label from a recognized testing
laboratory as an assembly, not as individual components.
1.21
SLEEVES:
A.
B.
For pipe passing through floors outside fire rated chases and fire rated walls and partitions,
Refer to Through-Penetration Firestop Systems where included in the contract documents.
Otherwise, seal between sleeve and pipe or pipe covering with 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25WB
caulk, Flamestop V, Specified Technologies, Inc. "Spec Seal Sealant", Rectorseal Corp.
Metacaulk 950 or Hilti FSONE bearing UL listing for actual conditions of installation, thickness
and application in strict accord with UL reference for each type installation. Any equivalents
must meet the 10 day prior approval provision and must show UL approval for all conditions,
bare pipe, insulated pipe, etc. For plastic piping material submittal must show UL approval for
each application and if caulk comes in direct contact with pipe, it must be compatible and not
injurious to the pipe.
C.
In existing construction, grout sleeves firmly in place.
D.
Sleeves for ducts: see fire dampers (Section: Air Distribution).
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 0500 - 7
E.
Where exposed ducts pass through walls and partitions, provide 4" wide 20 gauge galvanized
steel closure plates except at grilles and registers. Fit closure plates snugly to duct and secure
to wall.
F.
1.22
PAINTING:
A.
Refinish equipment damaged during construction to new condition.
B.
Paint un-insulated duct surfaces visible through grilles and registers flat black.
1.23
A.
Piping identification shall comply with the latest version of Auburn Universitys Design and
Construction Standards.
B.
Show pipe contents and direction of flow. Markers shall be taped in place. Markers shall be
equal to Craftmark, Brady, Seton or Brimar.
C.
D.
1.24
1.
2.
3.
4.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION:
A.
In accordance with the latest version of Auburn Universitys Design and Construction Standards.
B.
Provide 2" x 3" or larger laminated plastic nameplates with 1/2" numbers and letters in colors
specified below. Screw tags to equipment in obvious locations. Engrave equipment designation and
numbers as shown on plans and drawings on upper half of tag, leaving lower half of tag for future
engraving by Owner.
C.
Secure nameplates with acorn head screws.
1.25
A.
ACCESS DOORS:
Furnish and install access doors for valves, fire dampers, dampers, controls, air vents, and other
items located above non-liftout ceilings or behind partitions or walls. Doors in non-fire rated walls
and ceilings: 16-gauge steel with hinges and screwdriver latches. Doors in fire rated walls and
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 0500 - 8
ceilings: UL labeled with fire rating equal to fire rating of wall or ceiling. Provide door styles
compatible with adjoining surfaces as selected by Architect. Size doors to permit removal of
equipment and/or maintenance. Doors: Bar-Co, Nystrom, Williams Bros., or equal.
1.26
A.
All tests shall be witnessed by the Architect in addition to authorities having jurisdiction. A
minimum of 72 hour notice is required prior to performance of test.
B.
After systems have been installed complete, adjust and test systems for proper operation, air
distribution, temperatures, humidities and correct all noise or vibration conditions. All HVAC air
and water balance work shall be performed by an independent test and balancing agency
specializing in testing and balancing of air conditioning systems. The agency selected shall be
an AABC or NEBB member. All instruments used for testing and balancing must have been
calibrated within 6 months and checked for accuracy prior to start of work.
C.
Perform all tests as required by local codes. Contractor shall furnish testing equipment. All
piping pressure tests shall be hydrostatic tests.
D.
E.
Hot Water System:

1.
Before pipe covering has been installed, test all new work and make tight at two times
operating pressure but not less than 45 psig. (Provide temporary crossovers and
temporary pumps as required for cleaning new work before valves at connections to
existing work are opened.)
2.
Correct or replace defective workmanship or materials shown by tests, and retest as

necessary to insure tightness.
3.
After systems have been made tight, provide a supervised program of chemical cleaning
and degreasing prior to start-up. Program shall be supervised by the manufacturer of the
chemicals involved and upon completion of the cleaning operation manufacturer shall
provide a letter certifying that the cleaning program has been completed in accordance
with these specifications. Sufficient chemicals shall be added to each system to establish
a concentration of 0.5% detergent dispersant chemical containing a minimum of
dioctylculfosuccinate or equal detergent and 10% dispersants containing polyacrylate
and/or diphosphonate or equal. Systems shall then be circulated for a minimum of 8
hours, dumped, flushed, and refilled, with the correct corrosion inhibitors added for
operation. Hand clean strainers after flushing.
4.
When systems have been refilled with water, vent air from system, and insure that flow
has been established in all portions of systems.
5.
Test and balance agency shall balance water flow to all coils, etc., to within 10% of
specified flows. Unless flow sensors are shown, agency shall use manufacturer's data for
pressure drops through coils, etc. Setting of balancing valves shall be permanently
marked so they can be reset at any time. When water balance has been completed,
submit to Architect a water balance log, including design water flow rates together with
final water flow rates, pressure drops, etc. Information shall include for each system the
following:
a.
Water flow through each piece of equipment in system (coils, etc.).
b.
Water pressure drop through each piece of equipment.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 0500 - 9
c.
F.
Air System:
1.
When system has been completed, remove all trash and dirt, set grille bars and diffuser
patterns for required throws and adjust and balance air duct systems so air quantities at
outlets are as directed and distribution from each supply outlet is free from drafts and
excessive noise, and uniform over the face of each outlet.
2.
Make adjustments so dampers and volume adjusters close to air outlets will have the
least pressure drop consistent with volume requirements. Obtain additional pressure drop
required for balancing of shorter runs by adjusting dampers at branch duct take-offs.
3.
Balance variable volume air systems with outlets open to design cfm.
4.
Note that air terminal boxes are specified to be factory calibrated. However, recalibrate
each air terminal box in the field as part of this work.
5.
Direct reading velocity meters may be used for comparative adjustment of individual
outlets, but measure air quantities in ducts having velocities of 1000 feet per minute or
more with pitot tubes. Cap pitot tube openings in low pressure ducts with plastic plugs.
Cap pitot tube openings in medium pressure ducts with Duro-Dyne test ports.
6.
Permanently mark settings of dampers and other volume adjusting devices so they can
be restored if disturbed.
7.
When air balancing has been completed, submit to Architect an air balance log, including
design and actual air quantities, pressures, etc., in each branch duct and at each grille,
register, and outlet. Outlets shall be identified by room number, outlet size, outlet function
and design cfm. If plan coding is submitted, plans shall be of scale not smaller than 1/8"
= 1'-0".
8.
Include for each system the following information:

a.
1.27
Flow rates through each metered balancing valve.
Total air quantity supplied by each system.
A.
B.
C.
After completion of the work, Contractor shall operate the equipment which he installs for a
period of (10) working days, as a test of satisfactory operating conditions. During this time,
Contractor shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the correct operation of the
equipment.
D.
Provide 3 sets of manufacturer's operating and maintenance manuals and parts lists for all
equipment and materials furnished. Provide a maintenance schedule listing routine maintenance
operations and suggested frequency thereof. Include all warranty dates on equipment and
guarantees. Bind above items in loose-leaf 3-ring D binders with tab for each class of
equipment. Provide a PDF format file on CD ROM of the O&M data for each item of equipment
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 0500 - 10
or material as part of the close-out documents. Provide a minimum of one file per type of
equipment or material and index and title the file with the name of the equipment or material.
E.
1.28
A.
1.29
Make available to the Owner, without additional cost, service and adjustment of the equipment
for the guarantee period. Due to critical temperature guidelines Contractor shall respond to
Owner's call for service within a 6 hour time period.
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT:
Prior to the issuance of a certificate for final payment, submit to Architect and obtain his
approval of the following:
1.
Record drawings - sheet metal work: Two sets of bond prints, and CAD files.
2.
Record drawings piping: Two sets of bond prints, and CAD files.
3.
Record drawings - control systems: reproducibles.
4.
Control manufacturer's letter of certification (3).
5.
Air balance report (3).
6.
Water balance report (3).
7.
8.
Equipment operating and maintenance manuals with CD ROM of PDF files (3).
9.
Maintenance schedule (3).
10.
Equipment warranty dates and guarantees (3)
11.
12.
Letter certifying that the cleaning program for the hot water system has been completed in
accordance to the specifications.
TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL:
A.
The General Contractor shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and
ultimately to ensure that training is completed.
B.
The Engineer shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of
the training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment.
1.
The Owner will determine the special needs and areas where training will be most
valuable. The Owner shall decide how rigorous the training should be for each piece of
equipment.
2.
Each Sub and vendor responsible for training shall submit a written training plan to the
HVAC Engineer for review and approval prior to training. The plan will cover the following
elements:
a.
Equipment (included in training)
b.
Intended audience
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 0500 - 11
C.
c.
Location of training
d.
Objectives
e.
Subjects covered (description, duration of discussion, special methods, etc.)
f.
Duration of training on each subject
g.
Instructor for each subject
h.
Methods (classroom lecture, video, site walk-through, actual operational

demonstrations, written handouts, etc.)
i.
Instructor and qualifications
3.
For the HVAC equipment, the Controls Contractor shall provide a short discussion of the
control of the equipment during the HVAC training conducted by others.
4.
The General Contractor shall develop an overall training plan and shall coordinate and
schedule, with the Subcontractors and other consultants, the overall training for the
commissioned systems. The Engineer will recommend approval of the training to the
Owner upon satisfactory completion using a standard approval form. The Owner and
Contractors sign the approval form.
5.
Video taping of the training sessions will be provided at the Owners request.
HVAC Contractor. The HVAC Contractor shall have the following training responsibilities:
1.
Provide the HVAC Engineer and Owner with a training plan two weeks before the planned
training.
2.
Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the
understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of HVAC
equipment including, but not limited to, pumps, boilers, furnaces, chillers, heat rejection
equipment, air conditioning units, air handling units, fans, terminal units, controls and
water treatment systems, etc.
3.
Training shall normally start with classroom sessions followed by hands-on training on
each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including
startup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc.
4.
During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the
requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired
or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.
5.
The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on

each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece
of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer's representative. Practical building
operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific
piece of equipment are required. More than one party may be required to execute the
training.
6.
The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, as
requested, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment
being discussed.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 0500 - 12
7.
The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and
maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for
reference.
8.
Training shall include:
9.
a.
Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material

included in the O&M manuals.
b.
A review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating
requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts
inventory suggestions. The training shall include start-up, operation in all modes
possible.
c.
Discussion of warranties and guarantees.
d.
Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including
manual, start-up shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative
maintenance for all pieces of equipment.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 0500 - 13
SECTION 23 1000
MATERIALS AND METHODS HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE:
A.
Section 230500 - "General Provisions - HVAC" shall apply to and become part of this Section.
PART 2 - MATERIALS: (All pipe, fittings and valves shall be manufactured in the United States of
America)
2.1
HVAC VENT & DRAIN PIPING:

A.
2.2
Type L hard copper with wrought copper sweat fittings.
HOT WATER PIPING:

A.
Standard weight black steel pipe, ASTM A53 or A106. Fittings 2" and smaller, 125 psig W.P.
cast iron screwed fittings. Fittings 2-1/2" and larger, butt welding fittings. No mitering or notching
for fittings permitted. Weldolets permitted where branch size is 2 pipe sizes smaller than main.
45 degree saddles permitted where shown. Use long radius ells unless otherwise noted.
B.
Unions 2" and smaller black malleable, ground joint, screwed. Union 2-1/2" and larger, flanged.
C.
At Contractor's option hot water piping may be type L hard copper with wrought copper sweat
fittings made with 95-5 solder.
2.3
HVAC VALVES:
A.
Hot Water Valves:

1.
Globe valves 2" and smaller: All bronze, 150 psig WSP, composition disc, rising stems,
Nibco #T-235Y, Milwaukee #590T, or Watts B-4010-T.
2.
Check valves 2" and smaller: 125 psig WSP, threaded ends, brass or bronze body, spring
loaded, composition disc, Metraflex, Nibco #T-480Y, Watts #600, or Techno 5002-BR.
3.
Check valves between 2 and 5: 125 WSP, spring loaded non-slam center guide globe
check valve, flanged for 125# ASA 150 flanges. Bronze body, bronze seat and disc, stainless
steel spring. Mueller 105 MBP or equal. Install a minimum of 5 pipe diameters from pump
discharge.
4.
Check valves 2-1/2 and larger: 125 WSP, spring loaded, non-slam, center guide, globe
check valves flanged for installation between faces of 125# cast iron ASA 150 flanges,
iron body, bronze disc and seat, stainless steel spring, Nibco F-910.
5.
Ball valves for hot water: 600 psig WOG, screwed bodies, chrome plated bronze balls, full
port, teflon packing, bronze stem and steel handle, suitable for 350F operating
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
MATERIALS AND METHODS - HVAC

MW/DAVIS DUMAS & ASSOCIATES
23 1000 - 1
temperature. Include valve handle extension to clear 2" insulation. Nibco Nib-Seal T58570 (domestic), or Stockham Series 255, full port. Provide extension stem capable of
clearing 2" insulation, with memory stop, when operated will not disturb vapor seal of
insulation.
6.
B.
2.4
Butterfly valves: 200 psi WSP, designed for installation between ASA 150 flanges. Valves
shall have ductile iron bodies with tapped lugs for independent bolting to upstream and
downstream flanges, bubble tight (rated for bi-directional "dead end" service) under fullrated pressure with no flange on downstream side. Aluminum-Bronze discs, 416 stainless
steel stems, EPDM seats and stem seals, extended neck at least 2" beyond OD of
flanges, lever handles with infinite throttling and memory stops for valves 6" and smaller,
gear operators with memory stops capability for valves 8" and larger. Valves shall be
rated for 250F operating temperature. Provide padlock connections for valves located
outdoors. Nibco LD-2000, Demco - NEC5114351 or Dezurik - BG5XLIDIEBS2.
Control valves: Specified in Control/BAS/DDC Section.
PIPE HANGERS:
A.
given for reference. Provide copper clad or plastic coated hangers on bare copper lines.
B.
C.
Pipe hangers for piping 4" and larger: adjustable wrought clevis hangers.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Size rods for pipe hangers not smaller than the following: 3/8" rods for pipe up to 2", 1/2" for
2-1/2" and 3" pipe, 5/8" rods for 4" and 5" pipe, 3/4" rods for 6" pipe, and 7/8" rods for 8", 10"
and 12" pipe, 1" rods for 14" and 16" pipe and 1-1/8" rods for 18" pipe.
H.
Space pipe hangers at maximum: Pipe hanger spacing for screwed, solder joint and welded
piping: 1/2" and 3/4", 6 ft.; 1" to 1-1/4", 8 ft.; 1-1/2" to 2-1/2", 10 ft.; 3: and over, 12 ft. Install
additional hangers at change of direction, valve clusters, and at all duct and unit mounted coils.
I.
Install pipe hangers on insulated pipe over pipe covering. Provide factory fabricated insulated
pipe shields equal to Pipe Shields, Inc. "Thermal Hanger Shields" or Tru-Balance insulated
saddles at hangers. Provide shield insulation of rigid calcium silicate indoors or rigid Perlite
Silicate outdoors, the same thickness as adjacent pipe covering. (At Contractor's option, pipe
shields may be field fabricated using rigid calcium silicate or foamglass insulation with ASJ and
20 gauge galvanized steel protector. Shield length: 1.5 times nominal pipe size but not less than
4".)
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 1000 - 2
2.5
THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES:

A.
Non-mercury in glass blue reading separable socket industrial thermometers with die cast
aluminum or high impact plastic casings of appropriate pattern for each installation, 9 scale
lengths and ranges shown, Palmer, Trerice or Weksler. Install thermometers in brass or
stainless steel wells. Equip thermometers installed in insulated lines with 1 extension stems or
stems long enough to permit unions to clear insulation whichever is greater.
B.
Where shown install brass thermometer wells with screwed caps. Install wells at an angle to
retain oil. Size well to fit thermometers specified.
C.
Enlarge pipe 2" and smaller to 2-1/2" at thermometers and thermometer wells.
D.
Install 4-1/2" dial pressure gauges where shown. Gauges shall have bronze or stainless steel
bourdon tubes, 316 stainless steel movement, aluminum or polypropylene solid front cases,
adjustable micrometer pointer and accuracy Grade 2A not less than 1/2% of full scale over the
entire range, without mounting flange. Gauges shall be Ashcroft 1279, Marsh Series P01,
Trerice 450-B, Weksler AA44-2 or U.S. Gauge 1980L with minimum bourdon tube diameter of
3". Provide ball valves for all pressure gauges. Provide siphons for steam gauges.
E.
Where shown, provide temperature and pressure measurement plugs and caps equal to
Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. "Pete's plug with Nordel seats and seals". Provide one Pressure
and Temperature Kit consisting of a 0-100 psi pressure gauge with adaptors, and two
thermometers (25-125F and 0-220F), all in carrying cases. Provide nipples for Petes plugs as
required to extend thru pipe insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPE INSTALLATION:
A.
B.
Provide welding material and labor in accordance with the welding procedures of the Heating,
Piping, and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association or other approved procedure
conforming to the requirements of ANSI B31.9 "Building Service Piping". Employ only welders
fully qualified in the above specified procedure and currently certified by recognized testing
authority. Use either electric arc or oxyacetylene welding. Provide full perimeter welds at both
face end and collar end of each slip-on flange.
C.
Install piping to allow for expansion. Make connections to all equipment to eliminate undue
strains in piping and equipment. Furnish necessary fittings and bends to avoid springing of pipes
during assembly.
D.
Make horizontal water supply line size reductions using eccentric reducers (tops flat).
E.
Install 3/4" ball valve drains with hose adaptors at low points of water piping. Provide screwed
caps with chains on hose adaptors.
F.
Make connections to equipment using screwed unions in sizes 2" and smaller and flanged
unions in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Install unions in all piping connections to each piece of
equipment. Provide unions on all sides of control valves.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 1000 - 3
G.
Wherever ferrous pipes or tanks and copper tubing connect, provide dielectric insulating unions
or couplings, equal to Victaulic style 47, "V-line" insulating couplings as manufactured by
Lochinvar, thread to thread or CTS fabrication flange adaptors for flange connections.
H.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF VALVES:
A.
Provide shut-off valves in supply and return connections to each item of equipment. Locate
valves to isolate each item to facilitate maintenance and/or removal.
B.
Provide check valve in discharge line adjacent to each pump.
C.
Provide sweat to screw adaptors where required.
D.
Install with valve stems upright or horizontal.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 1000 - 4
SECTION 23 1500
THERMAL AND ACOUSTICAL INSULATION FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL:
A.
All external duct insulation and flexible duct shall be legibly printed or identified at intervals not
greater than 36 inches with the name of the manufacturer, the thermal resistance R-value at the
specified installed thickness and the flame spread and smoke-developed indexes of the
composite materials.
B.
All insulation shall be installed by an insulation contractor in business a minimum of 3 years as

an insulation contractor and has completed projects similar in scope to this project. Submit
insulation contractor qualifications.
C.
The installation of all insulation shall comply with the requirements of the contract documents
unless specifically noted and approved in submittal document. Compliance with contract
documentation shall be demonstrated by the insulation contractor as follows:
1.2
1.
Specific and random selections of the installed insulation shall be removed by the
insulation contactor for observation by the owners representative. The insulation
samples removed shall be selected by the owners representative.
2.
The insulation removed per observation selection shall not exceed 6 linear feet of piping
insulation (including fittings) or 4 sq. ft. of ductwork or equipment insulation if the sample
removed indicates compliance with the contract documents. If the sample removed does
not indicate compliance with the contract documents, additional samples shall be
removed for observation as directed by the owners representative up to a total of 4
samples.
3.
The total number of observations shall not exceed 4 per project unless the installation of
the insulation is found not to comply with the contract documents. Otherwise, the total
number of observations shall be as required by the owners representative to confirm
compliance.
4.
If the insulation is found not to be installed as required by the contract documents, the
insulation shall be removed and new insulation installed to comply with the specifications.
After completion of the new insulation, the testing procedure noted above shall be
repeated.
SCOPE:
A.
Section 230500 - General Provisions HVAC shall apply to and become part of this Section.
B.
Repair existing insulation at points of connection and/or alterations to existing work.
C.
Exposed is defined as: Exposed to view when construction is complete. (Items which are not
exposed are concealed.)
D.
The use of any material containing asbestos is prohibited.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
THERMAL AND ACOUSTICAL INSULATION

FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
23 1500 - 1
1.3
INSULATION:
A.
Comply with NFPA 90A.
B.
Pipe hanger shields are specified in Section 231000 - Materials and Methods - HVAC.
C.
Use insulation and adhesives with Underwriter's Laboratories and ASTM E-84 flame spread
rating not over 25 without evidence of continued progressive combustion, and smoke developed
rating not exceeding:
1.
50 for pipe covering located in air ducts, plenum or casings.
2.
150 for all other pipe, duct and equipment insulation.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1
FIBERGLASS PIPE COVERING:

A.
Snap-on glass fiber insulation minimum density 5#/cu. ft. maximum thermal conductivity at 75F
mean temperature 0.25 BTU/(hr)(sq. ft.)(F/in) with UL rated vinyl coated and embossed vapor
barrier laminate of aluminum foil and kraft reinforced with glass fiber yarns (ASJ).
B.
For all lines seal jacket with self sealing lap. Butt adjoining sections of insulation tightly and seal
with self-adhering butt joint strips.
C.
Cover fittings to thickness of adjacent covering with factory pre-molded fitting covers. Cover
flanged valve bodies and flanged unions. Do not cover screwed unions on hot lines. Finish
concealed fittings with a skim-coat of mastic and when mastic is dry, fitting shall be covered with
glass fab and vinyl acrylic mastic.
2.2
FOAMED PLASTIC PIPE COVERING: (DO NOT USE IN PLENUMS UNLESS COMPLIES
WITH PARAGRAPH 1.2 ABOVE):
A.
Fire retardant foamed plastic pipe covering, maximum K factor at 75F mean temperature not
exceeding 0.27 BTU/(hr)(sq.ft.)(F/in).
B.
Pipe covering may be seamless insulation slipped over piping before erection or may be slit
longitudinally and installed over erected piping.
C.
Make fitting covers from segments of pipe covering.
D.
Cement all joints and seams in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
E.
Fit pipe hangers over insulation (see PIPE HANGERS). Use hanger shields as specified under
pipe hangers.
F.
Imcolock, Armstrong or Rubatex.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
23 1500 - 2
2.3
COLD EQUIPMENT INSULATION (FOAMED PLASTIC): (DO NOT USE IN PLENUMS

UNLESS COMPLIES WITH PARAGRAPH 1.2 ABOVE)
A.
Fire-retardant foamed plastic insulating board having a thermal conductivity at 75F mean
temperature not exceeding 0.27 BTU/(hr) (sq.ft.) (F/in.). Fasten in place and seal joints with
adhesive in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Finish: Benjamin Foster white coating.
C.
2.4
DUCT INSULATION, EXTERNAL, FOR CONCEALED DUCTS:

A.
Flexible glass fiber insulation with foil-scrim-kraft (FSK) facing. Flame spread classification, 25
or less, smoke developed rating not exceeding 50. Minimum density, 1 lb./cu. ft., maximum
thermal conductivity at 75F mean temperature 0.26 BTU/(hr)(sq. ft.)(F/in).
B.
Fire-retardant foamed plastic insulating board having a thermal conductivity at 75 mean

temperature not exceeding 0.27 BTU/(hr)(sq.ft.)(F/in.). Fasten in place and seal joints with
adhesive in accordance with insulation manufacturers instructions.
2.5
1.
Finish: Benjamin Foster white coating.
2.
DUCT INSULATION, EXTERNAL, FOR EXPOSED INDOOR DUCTS:

A.
Fire retardant foamed plastic insulation. Paint with Benjamin Foster White coating. (Do not use
in plenums unless complies with Article 1.2.) Imcolock, Armstrong or Rubatex.
B.
6 lb/cu. ft. fiberglass board with FSK facing and thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.22
BTU/(hr)(sq.ft)(F/in) at 75F mean temperature.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
23 1500 - 3
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1
HVAC PIPING:
A.
Hot water supply and return piping; indoors above grade: Fiberglass pipe covering, thickness
per Table 1.
TABLE 1
INSULATION THICKNESS FOR HVAC HOT PIPING
Runouts
Mains & Risers
Service
Up to 1"
Hot Water
3.2
1/2"
Up to 2"
1"
1-1/4" 2-1/2"
to 2" to 4"
1"
1-1/2"
5"
to 6"
8"
and Up
1-1/2" 1-1/2"
DUCT INSULATION, EXTERNAL, FOR CONCEALED DUCTS:

A.
B.
For flexible glass fiber insulation:

1.
Lap jacket and vapor seal all joints and seams with suitable mastic.
2.
On rectangular ducts 30" wide and wider, support insulation with weld pins and speed
clips 18" on centers. Seal weld pins with mastic and FSK tape.
3.
Thickness and Extent: All sheet metal supply and outside air ducts and the top side of
supply diffusers: Minimum 2" thick except as noted below. Note: Conical and straight
spin-ins on both lined and unlined ducts shall be insulated as noted below. (See Foamed
Plastic Insulation below.)
Foamed Plastic Insulation:

1.
Insulate portions of fire damper sleeves in insulated ducts, which are not concealed in
walls, partitions and floors as specified with 3/4" thick foamed plastic insulation. Do not
extend the insulation through the wall, floor or partition. Seal to wall and glass fiber
insulation (or if lined duct seal foamed plastic insulation to duct with 3 lap over liner). On
externally insulated duct, lap glass fiber insulation over foamed plastic and seal to foamed
plastic.
2.
Insulate all flexible connectors in sheet metal ducts with 1 thick foamed plastic sheet with
joints sealed. Extend insulation minimum 3 upstream and downstream of flex connector
joints and seal to sheet metal duct.
3.
Insulate all casings, headers and return bends on duct-mounted coils, and coils at
terminal units with 3/4" thick foamed plastic insulation. Headers and return bends shall be
insulated with 3/4" foamed plastic cemented inside galvanized sheet metal covers
gasketed to coil casing.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
23 1500 - 4
4.
3.3
Insulate all conical branch duct fittings and straight branch duct spin-ins with 3/4" thick
foamed plastic insulation. Glass fiber insulation on the branch ducts shall overlap foamed
plastic insulation on the conical fittings and spin-ins. Seal fiberglass to foamed plastic.
For connections of flexible duct to spin-ins or conical branch duct fittings, connect flexible
duct inner liner to sheet metal with specified clamps and lap outer liner and insulation over
foamed plastic and clamp with Panduit strap. Seal flex duct outer cover to spin-in or
conical fitting insulation. Insulation contractor shall submit sample of spin-in and conical
fitting insulation and flexible duct connection for approval.
DUCT INSULATION, EXTERNAL, FOR EXPOSED DUCTS:

A.
Insulate all exposed supply, return and outside air ducts with 2" thick 6#/cu. ft. fiberglass board
with FSK jacket. Secure board with weld pins and speed clips 12" on centers. Seal clip
indentations with mastic. Seal all joints and seams with mastic.
B.
Cover all angles, seams and joint reinforcing with insulation and seal vapor tight.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
23 1500 - 5
SECTION 23 5000
HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE:
A.
Section 230500 General Provisions HVAC shall apply to and become part of this Section.
PART 2 - EQUIPMENT AND SPECIALTIES
2.1
WATER SPECIALTIES:
A.
Install 1/2" IPS x 150 psig WP float type automatic air vents in water lines as shown and/or
required to prevent air binding. Run 3/8 OD line to nearest floor drain (basement mechanical
room floor drain) from each vent. Install a 1/2" ball valve ahead of each air vent. Vents shall be
Armstrong, or equal.
B.
Strainers: 125 psig WP, pot or angle type as shown. Strainers 2" and smaller: bronze or iron
bodies with screwed connections; strainers 2-1/2" and larger: iron bodies and flanged
connections. Screens: bronze, monel metal or stainless steel with perforations as follows:
Strainer Size
Perforation Size
3/4" to 2" inclusive
1/32"
2-1/2" to 6" inclusive
1/16"
8" to 12"inclusive
1/8"
Over 12"
1/4"
The free area of each screen shall be not less than three times the area of the strainer inlet pipe.
Equip each strainer with 1/2" valved drain (ball valve with hose connection), and unless the
strainer design is devoid of air pockets, a 1/4" air vent cock.
C.
2.2
Balancing valves, 2 and smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 125 psig working pressure, 250F
maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves shall have venturi and ball
valve, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped
with a memory stop to retain set positions.
CENTRIFUGAL VENT SET:

A.
AMCA rated belt driven fans (as scheduled) having capacity shown. Equip belt driven fans with
V belt drives sized for 50% overload, adjustable pitch motor pulleys, and adjustable motor
bases. For all fans provide self aligning grease lubricated ball bearings, statically and
dynamically balanced air foil wheels, and galvanized steel housing with inlet bell and inlet and
outlet duct collars and baked enamel finish.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT

AND SPECIALTIES
23 5000 - 1
B.
Fans shall be explosion proof.
C.
Equip fans with weather hoods for motors. Equip fans with belt guards.
D.
Equip all fans with 95% efficient vibration isolators.
E.
Fans: Loren Cook, Greenheck, or Penn.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT

AND SPECIALTIES
23 5000 - 2
SECTION 23 6000
AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE:
A.
1.2
Section 230500 General Provisions HVAC shall apply to and become part of this Section.
SHOP DRAWINGS:
A.
See Section 230500 General Provisions HVAC.
B.
Ductwork Shop Drawings shall include details of duct construction: seams, joints, gauges,
reinforcing, elevations, and hanger details for each pressure class and size range together with
details of turning vanes, branch connections, dampers and access doors. Include access door
locations and sizes. Identify on the shop drawings duct sections as they will be identified for
fabrication and installation. Provide section drawings of locations where ducts cross or
demonstrate with elevations that ducts will fit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL:
A.
2.2
Air terminal submittal data shall include, for each terminal, both radiated and discharge sound
power in DB re 10 to the minus 12 watts in octave bands 2 through 7. All air terminal controls
shall be installed in a unit mounted control panel and shall be UL listed as an assembly.
VARIABLE AND CONSTANT VOLUME TERMINAL BOXES:

A.
Variable volume units consisting in general of a single duct attenuating box with automatic
volume regulator. Provide hot water heating coil. Maximum air pressure drop through box,
reheat coil and attenuator (where required) shall not exceed 0.5" WG. Air terminal boxes shall
be ARI certified and UL listed as an assembly.
B.
Discharge sound power levels referenced to 10 to the minus 12 watt in second through seventh
octave bands, respectively, shall not exceed the following for boxes operating with 1" static
pressure difference. Boxes up to 300 CFM: 67 DB, 62, 50, 49, 45, 40. Boxes over 300 CFM:
76DB, 69, 67, 62, 58, 52.
C.
Radiated sound power for boxes operated with 1" static pressure difference shall not exceed 60
DB re 10 to the minus 12 watt in the second octave band (125 cps).
D.
Attenuating box shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel sufficiently heavy to prevent oil
canning and fluttering but not lighter than SMACNA gauge for 2" pressure class duct of same
dimensions as box. Box shall be lined with minimum 1/2 thick fiber-free foam sound insulation
complying with fire hazard classification specified for duct insulation. Each box shall be
equipped with an access door for access to coil and volume regulator.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
AIR DISTRIBUTION
23 6000 - 1
E.
Coils shall comply with the following:

1.
Rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410-72 with capacities and dimensions shown.
2.
Provide coils with aluminum fins and seamless copper tubes.
3.
Headers may be iron castings or steel or copper tubing. Braze return bends.
4.
Space fins not closer than 10 per inch.
5.
Circuit water coils to maintain pressure drops shown.
6.
Provide coils tight with 200 psig under water air test.
7.
Coil casings: 16 gauge galvanized steel with flanges drilled for mounting.
F.
Coil casings, return bends and headers shall be equipped with sheet metal covers insulated with
3/4 foamed plastic insulation to prevent sweating. See insulation section for foam plastic
insulation specification.
G.
Box controls shall provide pressure independent operation and velocity sensors shall be of
multiple point averaging type, unaffected by inlet conditions. (If box manufacturer requires
straight duct on box inlet, such straight duct shall be furnished with the box.) All box controls
except room thermostat and water coil valve shall be factory installed and shall be calibrated by
the box manufacturer. Controls shall be by the control manufacturer (except velocity sensor and
volume dampers shall be furnished by the terminal manufacturer), and shipped to the terminal
manufacturer for installation and calibration. Controls shall be Direct Digital Control as specified.
Pressure taps and a calibration curve or similar method of field measuring box air rate shall be
provided for each box. A photostat of the box control diagram shall be cemented to each box.
Permanently mount all relays and pressure switches on box and provide control panel with cover
for all controls.
H.
Provide single point power connection for all components, and disconnect switch. Provide 24
volt control power transformer as required for single point power connection.
I.
Box control schemes shall be as shown on drawings.
J.
Boxes shall be Enviro-Tec, Price, Titus, or Trane.
2.3
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS:

A.
General: Air devices may be Price, Greenheck, Titus, Krueger or Nailor. Titus part numbers are
given for reference. Coordinate border and frame types for air devices with ceiling types as
shown on Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan.
B.
Rectangular Louver Face Diffusers One-, Two-, Three-, Four-Way or Corner Throw (LD): Fixed
pattern louver face diffusers, all aluminum with off-white enamel finish, removable cores latched
in place, opposed blade dampers, #TDC,-AA.
C.
Wall Return Registers (WRR): All aluminum, aluminum lacquer finish, horizontal bars fixed at
about 35 angle, plaster frames, opposed blade damper #350. (Wall Return Grilles {WRG}
Delete opposed blade damper).
D.
Wall Exhaust Registers (WER): Same as wall return registers.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
AIR DISTRIBUTION
23 6000 - 2
E.
Ceiling Return Registers (R): All aluminum, 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/2" cube core, plaster frame, opposed
blade dampers, off-white enamel finish #50F.
F.
Ceiling Exhaust Registers (E) and Ceiling Transfer Registers (T): Same as Ceiling Return
Registers.
2.4
SHEET METAL SPECIALTIES:

A.
Make rectangular take-offs in low pressure supply, return, and exhaust ducts using 45 entry tap
(SMACNA Duct Construction Standards Branch Connections figure #2-6) with manual damper
with end bearings and locking quadrant in branch. Saw-mark ends of damper rods parallel to
blades. End bearings and quadrants shall have air tight duct connections and shaft seals:
Duro-Dyne or equal.
B.
Manual balancing dampers: comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, figure
2-12 and 2-13. Equip all dampers with locking quadrants and end bearings. Saw-mark ends of
damper rods parallel to blades. End bearings and quadrants shall have air tight duct connections
and shaft seals, Duro-Dyne or equal.
C.
When Damper quadrants are located other than above lay-in ceilings.
1.
Substitute Young number 315 or 270-896C adjustable cover concealed regulators or

Ventlock #677 regulators and an additional end bearing for the quadrant (regulator covers
shall be off-white). Provide all cable, gears, joints, rods, etc. as required to place the
regulator in the ceiling within 6 feet horizontal of the damper, as directed by the Architect.
D.
Provide "Stand-offs" (hat sections) for damper quadrants, controls, etc., on externally insulated
ducts. "Stand-offs" are required at quadrants on spin-in dampers.
E.
Branch duct connections for connecting round low pressure branches to rectangular low
pressure trunks: galvanized steel spin-in fittings with integral dampers, and beaded collars,
similar and equal to Flexmaster, Series FLD for sheet metal trunks with stand-offs for quadrants
as noted above. Gauges: as required for pressure class. (26 gauge minimum.)
F.
Branch duct connections for connecting round medium pressure duct to rectangular medium
pressure duct: galvanized steel bellmouth fitting with neoprene gasket and pre-drilled mounting
holes equal to Buckley Air-Tite. Gauges as required for pressure class (24 gauge minimum).
Branch duct connections for connecting round medium pressure duct to round or flat oval
medium pressure duct: galvanized steel conical saddle or flanged fitting equal to United.
Gauges as required for pressure class (22 gauge minimum).
2.5
DUCTWORK - GENERAL:
A.
Unless otherwise shown or specified construct ducts of galvanized steel sheet metal using
gauges and recommended details as contained in the current edition of the SMACNA HVAC
Duct Construction Standards. Ductwork shall include supply air, exhaust air, return air, and
outdoor air ducts, together with all necessary fittings, splitters, dampers, quadrants, flexible
connections, sleeves, hangers, support, braces, etc. Hang and install ducts in a neat and
workmanship manner with adequate bracing and cross breaking to prevent breathing, rattling,
and vibration. DO NOT USE SNAP-LOCK SEAMS.
B.
Install Duro-Dyne locking quadrants and Duro-Dyne end bearings on all splitters and manual
volume dampers located above accessible ceiling and Young #315 regulator, and Duro-Dyne
end bearings elsewhere. Provide stand-offs for quadrants on externally insulated ducts. (Refer
also to Sheet Metal Specialties.)
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
AIR DISTRIBUTION
23 6000 - 3
C.
All duct turns (except as noted below for 90 degree turns) shall be radiused with a centerline
radius of 1.5 times the duct width in the plane of the turn. At the contractors option, 90 degree
turns may be square throat elbows vaned to provide a dynamic loss coefficient (C) not greater
than 0.2 or shall be radiused. Do not use push on vane runners. Duct turns less than 20
degrees may be mitered. Do not use off-sets that reduce the cross-sectional area of the duct.
D.
Duct Sealing: Seal duct seams and joints after assembly as noted below. Seal entire
circumference of all branch duct connections, tapping collars and spin-ins. Seal ducts using
mastic sealant equal to solvent based United Duct Sealer.
2.6
1.
Class A Seal: Seal all joints and seams and leak test at pressure specified. Leakage cfm
per 100 sq. ft. duct surface area shall not exceed 8 times the square root of the test
pressure in inches of water and no leaks shall be audible.
2.
Class B Seal: Seal entire circumference of all transverse joints, seal all longitudinal joints.
3.
Class C Seal: Seal entire circumference of all transverse joints.
4.
Class D Seal: Seal corners of transverse joints.
DUCTWORK - MEDIUM PRESSURE, RECTANGULAR:

A.
Ductwork medium pressure, rectangular shall include all rectangular ductwork between AC unit
discharge and terminal unit inlet.
B.
Provide galvanized steel sheet metal ducts of sizes shown on plans, and construct gauges and
recommended detail for 6" pressure class as contained in current edition of the SMACNA Duct
Construction Standards. DO NOT USE SNAP-LOCK SEAMS. Use reinforcement noted for the
longest side on all sides of the duct and bolt together at corners with minimum 5/16 diameter
bolts. Do not penetrate duct at reinforcement or hangers.
C.
Provide duct gauges and reinforcement size and spacing as follows:

Max. Duct Dimensions: Up to 16" -24 gauge duct with Ductmate, TDC, or equal joints on
48" centers.
17" - 22" 22 gauge duct with Ductmate, TDC, or equal
joints on 48 centers.
joints on 48 centers and 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/8" TK angle
on 24" on centers between Ductmate, TDC, or equal
joints..
joints and 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" TK angle on 24" centers
between Ductmate, TDC, or equal joints.
55" - 84" - 18 gauge duct with Ductmate, TDC, or equal
joints and 2" x 2" x 1/4" TK angle on 24" centers
Over 84" - 18 gauge duct with Ductmate, TDC, or equal
joints and 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 1/4" TK angle on 24" centers
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
AIR DISTRIBUTION
23 6000 - 4
D.
Provide hangers for medium pressure rectangular ducts consisting of a P2000 Unistrut trapeze
and 3/8" diameter rods. Do not penetrate the ductwork with screws at the hangers.
E.
Seal all ducts to SMACNA Class (A) classification and pressure leak test at 6" WG.
2.7
DUCTWORK - MEDIUM PRESSURE (ROUND):

A.
Medium pressure ductwork round includes all unlined round ducts between AC Unit discharges
and terminal units and all round exhaust ductwork.
B.
Ductwork: Factory fabricated galvanized steel round spiral lock seam ducts of 26-gauge for
ducts up to 8" in diameter, 24 gauge for ducts from 9" to 22", and 22-gauge for ducts 24"
through 36" in diameter and 20 gauge for ducts over 36" in diameter. Lock seams shall be
spaced on not more than 3" centers for ducts up to 5" in diameter, 6" centers for ducts from 6"
through 10", and 8" centers for ducts 12" and over in diameter.
C.
Fabricate fittings by continuous brazing or continuous electric welding. Thickness of metal for
round fittings: as specified for longitudinal seam ducts but not less than 22 gauge. Elbows shall
have centerline radius of 1.5 diameters, 5 piece construction over 8" diameter, die stamped 8"
and smaller. 90-degree take-offs shall be made with conical tees. Make connections to plenums
with bellmouths.
D.
Make transverse joints using beaded slip couplings, sealing compound equal to solvent based
United "Duct Seal", and sheet metal screws.
E.
Seal all ducts to SMACNA Class (A) classification and pressure and leak test ducts at 6" WG.
F.
Hang ducts using 1" x 12-gauge straps at transverse joints but not more than 8'-0" apart. Straps
shall completely encircle duct and shall be secured to construction with powder driven studs. Do
not penetrate the ductwork with screws at the hangers.
G.
Duct and fittings shall be United McGill Airflow, Semco, Spiral Pipe of Texas or Eastern Sheet
Metal.
2.8
DUCTWORK - LOW PRESSURE:

A.
Ductwork, Low Pressure, shall include all supply, return, exhaust and transfer ductwork except
as noted elsewhere.
B.
Construct ducts in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards for pressure and
seal classes noted below. Do not use snap-lock seam.
C.
Pressure and Seal Classes: 2 Pressure Class, Class B Seal.
D.
Hang ducts using 1x12-guage galvanized straps at transverse joints but not greater than 8 ft.
apart.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
AIR DISTRIBUTION
23 6000 - 5
E.
Reinforce ductwork in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards except as noted
below. Provide ductwork gauges as noted. Use reinforcement noted for the longest side on all
sides of the duct and bolt together at corners with minimum 5/16 diameter bolts. Do not
penetrate duct at reinforcement with screws.
2" Pressure Class Supply Duct
Maximum Duct Dimension:
Up to 12" - 24 gauge duct with flat drives and Ss on 48 centers.
13" to 18" - 24 gauge duct with 1" x 1" x 1/8" angle on 48" centers or Ductmate, TDC, or
equal joints on 48 centers.
19" to 22" - 24 gauge duct with 1" x 1" x 1/8" angle on 48" centers or Ductmate, TDC, or
equal joints on 48 centers.
23" to 30" - 24 gauge duct with 1 1/4" x 1 1/4" x 1/8" angle on 48" centers or Ductmate,
TDC, or equal joints on 48 centers.
31" to 48" - 22 gauge duct with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" angle on 48" centers or Ductmate,
TDC, or equal joints on 48 centers and 1x 1 x 1/8 angle centered between Ductmate,
TDC, or equal joints.
49" to 60" - 22 gauge duct with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" angle on 24" centers or Ductmate,
TDC, or equal joints on 48 centers with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" angle centered between
Ductmate, TDC, or equal joints.
Over 60 18 gauge duct with 2 x 2 x 1/4 angle on 24 centers or Ductmate, TDC, or
equal joints on 48 centers with 1 x 1 x 1/8 angle at Ductmate, TDC, or equal joints and
2 x 2 x 1/4 angle centered between Ductmate, TDC, or equal joints.
2" Pressure Class Return, Exhaust, and Outside Air Duct
Up to 12" - 24 gauge duct with flat drives and Ss on 48 centers.
13" to 22" - 24 gauge duct with Ductmate, TDC, or equal joints on 48 centers.
23" to 48" - 22 gauge duct with Ductmate, TDC, or equal joints on 48 centers.
49" to 60" - 20 gauge duct with Ductmate, TDC, or equal joints on 48" centers.
Over 60 18 gauge duct with Ductmate, TDC, or equal joints on 48" centers.
2.9
DUCTWORK LOW PRESSURE ROUND:

A.
Low pressure round ductwork includes all round supply, return, outside air, and exhaust
ductwork except as specified medium pressure round ductwork.
B.
Ductwork: Factory fabricated single-wall galvanized steel round spiral lock seam ducts of 28
gauge for ducts up to 14" in diameter, 26 gauge for ducts from 15" to 26" in diameter, 24 gauge
for ducts 27" to 36" in diameter, and 22 gauge for ducts over 36" in diameter.
C.
Fabricate fittings by brazing or continuous electric welding. Thickness of metal for round fittings:
26 gauge for fittings up to 14" in diameter, 24 gauge for fittings 15" to 26" in diameter, 22 gauge
for all fittings over 26" in diameter. Elbows shall have a center-line radius of 1.5 diameters, 5
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
AIR DISTRIBUTION
23 6000 - 6
piece construction. Take-offs shall be 45 degree laterals. Splitters (tees) shall be reducing YBranch with dampers.
D.
Make transverse joints using beaded slip couplings, sealing compound equal to solvent based
United Duct Seal and sheet metal screws.
E.
Provide hanger straps per SMACNA table no more than 8 ft. apart. Straps shall encircle duct.
Do not penetrate ductwork at hangers.
F.
Ductwork and fittings shall be United McGill Airflow, Semco, Spiral Pipe of Texas or Eastern
Sheet Metal round duct and fittings, 2" WG standard.
2.10
FLEXIBLE DUCTS:
A.
Flexible duct connectors: 2 element spiral construction composed of galvanized steel supporting
spiral and coated woven textile fabric with metal or mineral base, UL listed as Class I Air Duct
and Connector (UL 181).
B.
Flexible connectors shall not exceed 5 feet in length and turns shall not exceed 20 degrees with
maximum of two turns.
C.
Make connections between flexible ducts and other equipment using galvanized steel draw
bands with plated screws and buckles and United Duct seal for high and medium pressure ducts
and nylon draw bands for low pressure ducts.
D.
Factory insulate cold flexible ducts using insulation equivalent to that specified for cold ducts
minimum R5 rating and provide continuous vapor barrier at connections to other ducts and
equipment.
E.
Hang ducts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Flexible ducts: Thermaflex M-KC, or Flexmaster Type 4M.
2.11
AUTOMATIC DAMPERS:
A.
Coordinate size, quantity and locations of automatic dampers with automatic control work.
B.
Factory fabricated dampers with formed galvanized steel or extruded aluminum blades and
frames of steel or aluminum extrusions with full gasketed stops for blade ends. Equip blades
with air tight plastic or butyl rubber seals and bronze or nylon bearings.
C.
Outside air dampers and automatic dampers located near fan outlets or in ducts having
maximum velocities exceeding 1500 FPM shall have extruded aluminum air-foil blades and all
linkages shall be located outside of the airstream. Such dampers shall have leakage rates not
exceeding 1% of Maximum Design Flow at 4" WG pressure differential.
D.
Saw mark ends of damper rods parallel to blades.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
AIR DISTRIBUTION
23 6000 - 7
2.12
A.
B.
2.13
FIRE DAMPERS:
Provide and install UL labeled 1-1/2 hour fire dampers in make-up air connections at kitchen
hoods, wherever sheet metal ducts pass through chase walls, floors outside fire chases, and
elsewhere as shown or required by local code. See Architectural plans for fire ratings of walls.
All fire dampers required may not be shown on mechanical plans.
1.
Fire dampers shall be "venetian blind" dampers. Unless otherwise shown folded blades
and frames shall not obstruct air stream. Provide type C fire damper in all medium and
high pressure supply ducts. Dampers in floors shall be spring loaded.
2.
Provide factory fabricated steel wall (floor) sleeve 3" longer than wall thickness for each
fire damper and install sleeve using bolts and angles as detailed in Plate #1 of SMACNA
"Fire Damper Guide."
Install access door in ducts downstream from each fire damper. Install access door in low
pressure ducts at each fire damper.
ACCESS DOORS:
A.
Access doors in low pressure ducts: galvanized steel frame flange mounted permanently
secured to duct with a hinged gasketed access port held in place with thumb operated latches.
Doors in insulated ducts: double thickness with insulation. Doors in non-insulated ducts: a single
thickness. Size doors to permit removal of equipment or maintenance. Minimum 18 x 18 in
ducts 20 or greater. Minimum 12 x 12 in ducts 14 to 18 and minimum 8 x 12 in ducts 10
to 12. If duct is less than 10, enlarge duct at access door (and fire damper, if applicable) to
allow minimum 8 x 12 access door. Kees FH series standard pressure flanged mount.
Install for flush interior on double wall doors.
B.
Access doors in medium pressure supply ducts: Factory fabricated combination

view/access/vacuum-relief doors consisting of a galvanized steel frame welded to duct with
double wall inwardly-opening transparent plastic door. Latches shall secure plastic door to frame
but release door into duct to act as a vacuum breaker. Attach a retaining chain to frame and
door for doors without hinges. Door size (minimum) 8 x 12 for round ducts up to 12" diameter,
and oval or rectangular ducts up to 16" maximum side; 12 x 12 for round ducts 13" to 18" and
oval or rectangular ducts 17" to 24" maximum side and 14" x 20" for larger ducts. Doors shall be
tight under 10" WC pressure and shall pop open under 6" WC vacuum. Kees FIN-H high
pressure flanged mount on rectangular ductwork or flat side of flat-oval ductwork. Kees ADH-HP
for round ductwork or round side of flat-oval ductwork.
C.
Mark access points in lift-out ceilings with colored vinyl stick-on discs. Locate discs on grid
adjacent to point of access.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176
AIR DISTRIBUTION
23 6000 - 8
SECTION 23 8100
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
PART 1 - GENERAL:
1.1
PROVISIONS OF DIVISION 23:

A.
1.2
Section 23 05 00 - "General Provisions - HVAC" shall apply to and become part of this Section.
PROVISIONS OF DIVISION 26:

A.
1.3
"General Provisions, Electrical" shall apply to this Section.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A.
Provide a building automation system (BAS) consisting of a network of distributed direct digital
control processors (DCP) bus connected to a central computer. DCP's shall be microprocessor
based and strategically located at data concentration points or in close proximity to the end
devices to be monitored and/or controlled. The DCP's shall include stand alone capability of
direct digital control with integrated energy management programs including duty cycling,
demand, optimum start and analog load reset.
B.
Provide all sensors, actuators, transducers, DCP's and central equipment to meet functional
description.
C.
Control equipment, except for items comprising an integral part of the water or refrigeration
piping, shall be installed by trained mechanics employed by the BAS manufacturer.
D.
Use standard components, regularly manufactured and not custom designed for project. Use
systems and components proven in use.
E.
System shall be modular, permitting expansion by adding hardware and software without
changes in communication or processing equipment.
1.4
WORK REQUIRED:
A.
All engineering design, labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to proper completion of BAS work as shown or herein specified (excepting only work
or materials specified or noted as being done or furnished by others), consisting in general of the
following, complete and ready for operation.
1.
Central Control (CC) Connect new devices to existing Central Control
2.
Distributed Control Panels (DCP)
3.
Software packages
4.
Remote control, alarm and sensing devices
5.
Complete wiring network interconnecting all parts of the system
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 8100 - 1
1.5
6.
Instruction of Owner's operating personnel
7.
Service contract
SUBMITTALS:
A.
1.6
Within 30 days of notice to proceed and prior to installation of any equipment, the BAS
contractor shall provide 6 copies of submittals for approval. Submittals shall include:
1.
A complete system block diagram showing all computers, peripherals, power connections
and source, plan of equipment in main control room, trunk wiring links, DCP's and
location, and a listing of all points and systems connected to each DCP.
2.
Complete operating sequences for all programs provided for HVAC equipment.
3.
Specification data sheets for each piece of central and remote hardware, for software
application package and for central programs and system services software.
4.
Locations of all control panels by room name and number.
ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURES:
A.
Upon completion, the contractor shall conduct a complete functional test of the system for the
owner, and engineer. Contractor shall simulate power failure recovery, and stand alone
operation capability on communication loss with Central Control.
B.
Provide 3 full sets of as-built drawings, complete operating manuals and hardware and software
documentation.
1.7
WARRANTY SERVICE:
A.
All components, software, parts and assemblies supplied by the manufacturer shall be
guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for one year from acceptance date.
B.
Labor to trouble shoot, repair or replace system components shall be furnished at no charge to
the owner during the warranty period.
1.8
MAINTENANCE:
A.
The BAS manufacturer shall have a local branch office within 100 miles of the installation staffed
with trained, full-time employees capable of performing testing, inspection, repair and
maintenance services for the life of the system.
B.
The meantime to repair once the BMS manufacturer's service representative is at the job site
with the required parts shall not exceed two hours.
1.9
SYSTEM COMMISSIONING:
A.
The Contractor shall completely checkout, calibrate and test all hardware and software to insure that
the system performs in accordance with the approved sequences of operation submitted.
B.
Include the services of a full time control technician for calibrating and adjusting controls for the first
10 working days after Owner has occupied building.
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 8100 - 2
C.
1.10
A.
Provide assistance to the Test and Balance Contractor during his review and testing of the Control
Systems.
OPERATOR TRAINING:
Contractor shall provide a minimum of two full day's instruction for the owner's operating
personnel on system operation and routine maintenance procedures. The BAS manufacturer
shall also provide four additional days of on-site instruction and assistance to the owner during
the warranty period on a call basis. The owner shall schedule these days at least one week in
advance and for intervals of no less than eight hours at a time. The four days are exclusive of
necessary travel time. These sessions shall encompass all areas of the system as requested by
the owner including troubleshooting, diagnostics and all levels of operation and software
definition.
PART 2 - EQUIPMENT:
2.1
GENERAL:
A.
System components requiring line voltage inputs shall be designed and tested to operate
satisfactorily and without damage at 10% above and 15% below nominal rated input voltage.
B.
All transmission bus connected devices shall be such that loss of any single device shall not
disrupt or interfere with communication to other devices on the bus. Loss of communication with
the central control and command station shall not cause any DCP to halt operation or to cease
to perform its intended function (i.e., each DCP shall continue to operate on a stand alone
basis).
C.
After power failure and upon a power restoration, the system shall provide automatic sequential
restart of equipment based on current program time and program requirements without operator
intervention.
2.2
DISTRIBUTED DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL PROCESSORS (DCP'S):

A.
To prevent a single-failure catastrophe, multiple direct digital controllers shall be provided.

Failure of any single controller shall have no effect on other controllers.
B.
Direct digital controllers shall be microprocessor-based with all hardware, software, and
communications interfaces. DCP's shall be capable of stand-alone operation, and incorporation
into larger systems. The controllers shall be either 16 bit, or multiple 8 bit microprocessors
configured so that input-output processing and operator command processing may be offloaded
from the control processing. If the DCP's use digital communication to remote "slave" gathering
panels, all such communication circuits extending outside the DCP shall utilize dual (redundant)
bus cabling, be supervised, and provided with an auto-failover feature.
C.
The controller shall be factory mounted and wired in a steel enclosure complete with all relays,
digital to analog converters, and terminal strips. Controllers shall be expandable to 15% points
of each type (analog and digital input and output) in excess of those actually required for this
project.
D.
The controller shall operate within the following limits:

1.
Temperature 33 to 122F.
2.
Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 8100 - 3
3.
E.
F.
Voltage 24 VAC + 10% to -15% 50 or 60 HZ.
The controllers shall withstand storage conditions as follows:

1.
Temperature -4 to 176F.
2.
Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Local Diagnostics and Programming:

1.
Each DCP shall be equipped to provide local diagnostics and adjustments either through
a built-in digital display and keyboard to show such information as time and date, analog
variables, binary conditions, system operation modes, critical alarms and operator
definable functions to allow the operator to analyze and adjust the system being controlled
or through a portable hand held operator's terminal.
2.
Adjustments shall include but not be limited to proportional gain, integral rate, velocity and
acceleration constants associated with incremental control and on/off values of twoposition control.
3.
The DCP shall be fully field programmable with the following built-in functions:
a.
All closed loop control functions (P, PI, PID, incremental, floating, two-position, etc.)
b.
All energy management functions
G.
The system shall utilize PROM and RAM memory. All DDC algorithms and parameters shall be
RAM based for ready access for modification and adjustment. RAM memory shall be provided
with 100 hours battery backup minimum.
H.
The controller software shall include a complete operating system, standard energy
management application packages, standard control algorithm application packages, and an
owner/user custom control and calculation application package complete with interpreter.
Complete user documentation modules shall be provided.
I.
DCP's shall be capable of being programmed to utilize stored default values for assured fail safe
operation of critical processes. Default values shall be invoked upon sensor failure or, if the
primary value is normally provided by the CC or another DCP, by loss of bus communication.
Individual application software packages shall also be structured to assume a fail safe condition
upon loss of input sensors. Loss of an input sensor shall result in output of a "sensor failed"
message at the central control and command station.
J.
The operating system software shall be PROM resident and operate independently of any
central computer. The operating system shall control communications between the central
terminal and the controllers and I/0 modules, provide alarm monitoring and reporting, provide
control application packages, and contain built-in diagnostic routines.
K.
The controller shall have memory error checking. Upon detection of a memory error, the CPU
shall correct the error or halt to prevent erroneous operation. All "halts" shall report as an alarm
at the central control terminal.
L.
After a power failure and upon a power restoration, the system shall provide automatic
sequential restart of equipment based on current program time and program requirements
without operator invention.
M.
Controllers shall accept industrial platinum and resistance sensors. Each output point shall be
provided with an L.E.D. which shall indicate status of digital outputs and value (via variable
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 8100 - 4
intensity) of analog outputs. Processor software shall allow for scaling and for calibration of
sensor lead length variations to insure display accuracies.
2.3
SOFTWARE:
A.
2.4
Update existing software for controlling new devices and control points.
TRANSMISSION NETWORK:
A.
Communications between controllers shall have a system line capability of at least 3300 feet, or
systems shall be equipped with modems.
B.
Transmission line shall be electrically isolated from the DCP's and operator's terminal by optical
couplers at each interface to prevent any voltages in the transmission lines from damaging any
of the electronic circuits.
2.5
CONTROL WIRING:
A.
Include all control and interlock wiring and power wiring for DCP's and control panel in this
Section. Install in conduit in accordance with provisions of Electrical Work.
B.
Firestop conduit penetrations of fire rated walls and partitions.
C.
Wire all devices individually to terminal strips in control panels.
D.
Furnish necessary relays and auxiliary contacts and other accessories required. Provide
interlock relays per N.E.C. Coordinate start-stop stations, auxiliary contacts, etc., with supplier of
Starters specified in Electrical Work.
2.6
CONTROL DEVICES:
A.
Room Temperature Sensors: Accuracy + 0.1F.
B.
Damper Operators: Of sufficient power to close/open dampers under operating conditions.
C.
Provide stand-offs for control devices mounted on externally insulated ducts and equipment.
D.
Anchor all items mounted on gypsum board (dry-wall) using toggle bolts or moly bolts, not
expansion shields.
E.
Provide permanent nameplates for control switches and motor starters. Nameplates: engraved
laminated plastic with letters legible under normal operating conditions. (White on black).
F.
Permanently identify control devices, so they may be identified on control diagrams. Provide
engraved plastic nameplates for items mounted outside of or on faces of panels. Mark other
instruments with indelible ink.
G.
Control Valves:
1.
125 psig WP with plug and disc inner valve to insure modulation of flow where required.
Valves 2 and smaller: all brass screwed or flared. Valves 2-1/2 and larger: flanged iron
bodies and brass trim. Equip all valves with operators of sufficient power to insure
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 8100 - 5
tightness against pressure. Control valves operating with inlet steam pressure greater
than 15 psig shall have stainless steel trim and renewable seats.
H.
I.
2.
Control valves shall be sized by the manufacturer of the control valve, based on actual
capacity of equipment to be installed, and according to American National Standards
Institute/Instrument Society of American Standard S75.01, Control Valve Sizing Equations.
Sizing data shall be submitted to Architect for review and acceptance.
3.
Control valves shall shut against 60 psig inlet pressure.
Automatic Dampers:
1.
Factory fabricated dampers with formed galvanized steel or extruded aluminum blades
and frames of steel or aluminum extrusions with full gasketed stops for blade ends. Equip
blades with air tight plastic or butyl rubber seals and bronze or nylon bearings.
2.
Outside air dampers and automatic dampers located near fan outlets or in ducts having
maximum velocities exceeding 1500 FPM shall have extruded aluminum air-foil blades
and all linkages shall be located outside of the airstream. Such dampers shall have
leakage rates not exceeding 1% of Maximum Design Flow at 4" WG pressure differential.
3.
Saw-mark ends of damper rods parallel to blades.
Valves & Damper Operators: Of sufficient power to close/open valves and dampers under
operating conditions. Electric valve and damper motors shall have oil immersed gear trains and
spring return to normal position.
PART 3 - CONTROL SEQUENCES:
3.1
GENERAL:
A.
Control diagrams on drawings are intended to indicate, in general, control arrangements.

Provide all instruments, relays, operators, switches, etc. required to accomplish control
sequences whether or not such devices are actually shown on control diagrams.
B.
As shown on drawings.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
MW/DDA 211176

23 8100 - 6
SECTION 26 0519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A.
Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.
B.
Conductor Insulation:
Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THW-2 and
Type THHN-2-THWN-2.
2.2
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A.
2.3
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A.
Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B.
Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
3.2
CONDUCTOR INSULATION APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A.
Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
B.
Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
C.
Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2,

single conductors in raceway.
D.
Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
E.
Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors

in raceway.
F.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single
conductors in raceway.
G.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below

Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
3.3
Slabs-on-Grade,
and
Type THHN-2-
Underground:
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A.
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
03243-00.000
HYDE ENGINEERING, INC.
Controlled document is electronic file on Kahn server. Verify latest version. ( c)
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS
26 0519 - 1
B.
Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.
C.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
E.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members,
and follow surface contours where possible.
F.
Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
B.
Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material.
C.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.
3.5
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
B.
Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of
conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A.
3.7
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.8
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration
Firestopping."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections:

1.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1.
Procedures used.
2.
Results that comply with requirements.
3.
Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS
26 0519 - 2
SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
2.2
CONDUCTORS
A.
2.3
Bare Copper Conductors:

1.
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2.
Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3.
Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4.
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.
5.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6.
Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8
inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
7.
Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
CONNECTORS
A.
Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.
B.
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.
C.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.
D.
Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire
terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
2.4
GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A.
Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG
minimum.
1.
Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.
C.
Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1.
Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2.
Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3.
Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
03243-00.000
GROUNDING AND BONDING

26 0526 - 1
4.
3.2
Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A.
3.3
Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the
ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.
GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
B.
Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods around the pad. Ground
pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by
connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper
conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for taps to equipment grounding terminals.
3.4
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B.
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,
humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct
and connected metallic piping.
C.
Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
D.
Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate
insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with
branch-circuit conductors.
3.5
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B.
Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96
when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground
directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service
grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode
conductor, and install in conduit.
C.
Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if
any.
D.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1.
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2.
Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3.
Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection
is required, use a bolted clamp.
E.
Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;
use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one
03243-00.000

26 0526 - 2
of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or
sleeve to conductor at each end.
Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
2.
3.
3.6

A.
Perform tests and inspections. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of
accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000

26 0526 - 3
SECTION 26 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

Construction requirements for concrete bases.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.
C.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the
applied force.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA4.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed
for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in
riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as
required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints:

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
F.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
03243-00.000
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0529 - 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, [zinc-coated] [stainless] steel, for

use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes
and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slottedsupport
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1.
D.
3.2
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 11/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems
above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC
may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
D.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm)
03243-00.000

26 0529 - 2
6.
7.
8.
E.
3.3
thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs
less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers
and nuts.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated
metal supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in
both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from
edge of the base.
B.
Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete.

Concrete materials,
reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous
Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C.
Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1.
2.
3.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000

26 0529 - 3
SECTION 26 0533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
2.
Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
3.
Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
4.
Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
5.
Surface raceways.
6.
Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
7.
Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior
ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.
2.
Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface
pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes
serving communications systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A.
Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
C.
IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
D.
PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1.
Comply with NEMA RN 1.
2.
Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.
E.
EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
F.
FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
G.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
H.
Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1.
Fittings for EMT:
a.
Material: Steel.
b.
Type: compression.
2.
Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for
environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
3.
Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm),
with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
I.
Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities
having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and
protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2
NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A.
Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.
03243-00.000
RACEWAYS AND BOXES

26 0533 - 1
C.
RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
D.
LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.
E.
Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.
F.
Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.
G.
Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and
material.
H.
Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.
2.3
METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A.
Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise
indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1.
Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as
required for complete system.
2.4
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A.
General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
B.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
C.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.
D.
Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
E.
Metal Floor Boxes:

1.
Material: Cast metal or sheet metal.
2.
Type: Fully adjustable.
3.
Shape: Rectangular.
4.
Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
F.
Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb

(23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg)
shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.
G.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
H.
Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes:

galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.
I.
Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
J.
Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm
deep) <Insert dimension>.
K.
Gangable boxes are allowed.
L.
Cabinets:
1.
NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.
Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3.
Key latch to match panelboards.
4.
Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,
03243-00.000
RACEWAYS AND BOXES

26 0533 - 2
5.
6.
2.5
Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A.
General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1.
Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as
defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.
2.
Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
B.
Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and
aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a
combination of the two.
1.
Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.
2.
Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural
load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.
4.
Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
5.
Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.".
6.
Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts
for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1.
Exposed Conduit: IMC.
2.
Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: IMC.
3.
Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC,.
4.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5.
Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B.
Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.

1.
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2.
Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
3.
Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
4.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
5.
Damp or Wet Locations: IMC.
6.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless
steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
C.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.
D.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
2.
PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this
type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after
installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and
apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
3.
EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
4.
Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
E.
Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
03243-00.000
RACEWAYS AND BOXES

26 0533 - 3
F.
Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
G.
Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C).
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements
on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.
Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and
number of floors.
B.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hotwater pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C.
Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for
hangers and supports.
D.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
E.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm)
of changes in direction.
F.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
G.
Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached.
H.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1.
Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals.
2.
Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
3.
Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover in all
directions.
4.
Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location.
5.
Change from ENT to IMC before rising above floor.
I.
Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1.
Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.
2.
Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.
J.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
K.
Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive

compound prior to assembly.
L.
Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35-mm) trade size and insulated
throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with
locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
M.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each
end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside
raceways in use.
N.
Surface Raceways:
1.
Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm)radius control at bend points.
03243-00.000
RACEWAYS AND BOXES

26 0533 - 4
2.
Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway
section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape
and glue are not acceptable support methods.
O.
Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.
P.
Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
raceways at the following points:
1.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2.
Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
3.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
Q.
Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature
change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds
25 feet (7.6 m).
Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each
of the following locations:
a.
Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)
temperature change.
b.
Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature
change.
c.
Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F
(70 deg C) temperature change.
d.
Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.
Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot
of length of straight run per degree F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per
degree C) of temperature change for PVC conduits.
Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time
of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
R.
Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830
mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to
vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1.
Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2.
Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
S.
Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually
indicated, give priority to ADA requirements.
T.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box.
U.
Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
V.
Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
W.
Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
03243-00.000
RACEWAYS AND BOXES

26 0533 - 5
X.
Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
Y.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
Z.
Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A.
Direct-Buried Conduit:
1.
Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches (150
mm) in nominal diameter.
2.
Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3.
After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of
conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as
temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches
(300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete
backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
4.
Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-up at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts
throughout length of elbow.
a.
For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where
conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a
minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of foundation or equipment base.
Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
5.
3.4
Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification

for Electrical Systems."
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A.
Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from
1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent
undisturbed earth.
C.
Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of
other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.
D.
Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut
wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to
be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
3.5
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.6
Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
Comply with
PROTECTION
A.
Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2.
Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
RACEWAYS AND BOXES

26 0533 - 6
SECTION 26 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Identification for raceways.
2.
Identification of power and control cables.
3.
Identification for conductors.
4.
Underground-line warning tape.
5.
Warning labels and signs.
6.
Instruction signs.
7.
Equipment identification labels.
8.
Miscellaneous identification products.
B.
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1.
B.
C.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A.
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1.
Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
2.
1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
3.
Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).
2.2
INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A.
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up
to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1.
Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3.
Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
B.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
C.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall
provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
2.3
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A.
Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
B.
Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1
inch (25 mm).
03243-00.000
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0553 - 1
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A.
Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or
interior).
B.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
B.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
C.
Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
D.
System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band
shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in
contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,
at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals
in congested areas.
E.
Underground-Line Warning Tape:

During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below
finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or
concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.
F.
Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation
and paint application.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch
Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Install labels at 10-foot (3-m) maximum
intervals.
B.
Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull
box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and
system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1.
Emergency Power.
2.
Power.
3.
UPS.
C.
Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive-film-type labels.
D.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and
signal connections.
1.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
E.
Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1.
Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.
2.
Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
03243-00.000
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0553 - 2
F.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of
access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in
finished spaces.
G.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Bakedenamel warning signs.
1.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2.
Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3.
Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4.
For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Power transfer switches.
b.
Controls with external control power connections.
H.
Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with
approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
I.
Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at
equipment used for power transfer.
J.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1.
Labeling Instructions:
a.
Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-)
high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required,
use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
b.
Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
c.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
d.
Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of
the enclosure.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0553 - 3
SECTION 26 2416
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of

installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Operation and maintenance data.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
C.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A.
Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1.
Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a.
b.
2.
3.
Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.
B.
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
C.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type.
Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate
at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material.
Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one
or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
03243-00.000
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 1
E.
Future Devices:
Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary
appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
F.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating:

current available at terminals.
2.2
Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.3
Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying

with UL 1449 SPD Type 1.
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C.
Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
D.
Mains: Circuit breaker.
E.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Bolt-on circuit breakers.
F.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:
Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires
mechanical release for removal.
G.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.
2.4
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.

B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C.
Mains: Circuit breaker.
D.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
E.
Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
F.
Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box
equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.
2.5
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.

03243-00.000
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 2
B.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1.
2.
3.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,

and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip
setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (6-mA trip).
Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault
protection (30-mA trip).
Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V,
single-pole configuration.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
C.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
Application Listing:
Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
Shunt Trip: 120 <Insert voltage>-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to
trip at 55 percent of rated voltage.
Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in
on or off position.
Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.
Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
1.
2.6
Instantaneous trip.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Section 262813
"Fuses."
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A.
Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
C.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1.
Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
03243-00.000
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 3
D.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
E.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
F.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room
designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C.
Panelboard Nameplates:
Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.3

A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1.
2.
C.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:

1.
2.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 4
SECTION 26 2726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2.
Weather-resistant receptacles.
3.
Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
4.
Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
Coordination:
1.
Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single
source from single manufacturer.
GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
B.
2.3
STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A.
2.4
Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
Comply
with
NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
General Description:
1.
Straight blade, non-feed-through type.
2.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.
3.
Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer
provides proper GFCI protection.
B.
Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
2.5
TOGGLE SWITCHES
A.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
B.
Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
C.
Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:
1.
Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."
D.
Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1.
Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
2.6
WALL-BOX DIMMERS
A.
Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with
audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
B.
Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with
UL 1472.
03243-00.000
WIRING DEVICES
26 2726 - 1
C.
Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off
switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.
1.
600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices.
D.
Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches:

Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim
potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent
dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
2.7
WALL PLATES
A.
Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1.
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2.
Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished, Type 302
stainless steel.
3.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4.
Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
B.
Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weatherresistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
2.8
FINISHES
A.
Device Color:
1.
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless
otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2.
Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
3.
TVSS Devices: Blue.
B.
Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Coordination with Other Trades:

1.
Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device
boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against
outside of boxes.
2.
Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3.
Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4.
Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C.
Conductors:
1.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2.
Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4.
Existing Conductors:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.
Device Installation:
1.
Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were
installed before building finishing operations were complete.
03243-00.000
WIRING DEVICES
26 2726 - 2
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)
in length.
When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.
Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.
When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E.
Receptacle Orientation:
1.
Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the right.
F.
Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G.
Dimmers:
1.
Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
2.
Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
3.
Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical
and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multigang wall plates.
I.
Adjust locations of service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
3.2
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
3.3
Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is

not required.
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections:

1.
Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
2.
Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout
or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
B.
Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1.
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2.
Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.
3.
Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5.
Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6.
Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
C.
Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION
03243-00.000
WIRING DEVICES
26 2726 - 3
SECTION 26 2816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Fusible switches.
2.
Nonfusible switches.
3.
Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
4.
Enclosures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
NC: Normally closed.
B.
NO: Normally open.
C.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4
Include plans, elevations,
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with
capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are
specified.
Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
03243-00.000
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 2816 - 1
2.2
NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.

following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
C.
Accessories:
1.
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3.
Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
2.3
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A.

following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting
capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for
circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
D.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less
than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
E.
Features and Accessories:

1.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2.
Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
3.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting
circuits.
4.
Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with
mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings,
push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zerosequence current transformer/sensor.
5.
Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
6.
Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic
circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
2.4
ENCLOSURES
A.
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to
comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1.
Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
3.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
03243-00.000

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 2816 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
C.
Install fuses in fusible devices.
D.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.3
Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2.
Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2.
Test continuity of each circuit.
C.
Tests and Inspections:

1.
2.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D.
Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches
and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION
03243-00.000

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 2816 - 3
APPENDIX
EMSL Analytical, Inc

1800 Water Place, Suite 228, Atlanta, GA 30339
Phone: (770) 956-9150
Attn:
Fax: (770) 956-9181
Corbin Hamby
Auburn University
Facilities Division - Asbestos Unit
1161 West Samford Avenue, Building II
Auburn, AL 36849
Fax:
(334) 844-2421
Project:
Walker
Phone:
(334) 844-4664
Email: atlantalab@emsl.com
Customer ID:
Customer PO:
ABRN78
Received:
01/31/12 12:30 PM
EMSL Order:
071201122
EMSL Proj:
Analysis Date:
1/31/2012
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA
600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy
Non-Asbestos
Sample
WBP001-Floor Tile
Description
Floor Tile & Glue
Brown
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Floor Tile & Glue
Black
071201122-0001
WBP001-Mastic
Floor Tile & Glue
Fibrous
Asbestos
% Non-Fibrous
% Type
98% Non-fibrous (other)
2% Chrysotile
<1% Chrysotile
Brown
2% Chrysotile
2% Chrysotile
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
071201122-0002
WBP002-Mastic
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
071201122-0001A
WBP002-Floor Tile
Appearance
Floor Tile & Glue
071201122-0002A
Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Initial report from 01/31/2012 16:01:34
Analyst(s)
Anthony Sanaie (2)
Thomas Michel (2)
Daoxin Li, PhD, Lab Director

or other approved signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL
bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be
used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a
problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision
and uncertainty data available upon request.
Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc Atlanta, GA NVLAP Lab Code 101048-1
Test Report PLM-7.23.0 Printed: 1/31/2012 4:01:34 PM
THIS IS THE LAST PAGE OF THE REPORT.

Cast-in-Place Concrete Specification

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cast-in-Place Concrete Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION 03 3000

Joint devices associated with concrete work.

Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

ACI 212.3R - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2004.

ACI 229R - Controlled Low-Strength Materials (CLSM); 1999 (Reapproved 2005).

ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; 2004.

See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Form Materials: CONTRACTOR's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to

Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type.

Aggregate, Fine and Coarse.

Crushed stone or Gravel.

Welded Wire Reinforcement.

Chairs, Bar Supports, or Other Devices Holding Reinforcing Bars in Place.

Epoxy Bonding Agent.

Design concrete mixes for types of concrete specified.

To determine quantity to be added, CONTRACTOR's laboratory shall prepare trial

Water Reducing Admixtures.

When, in opinion of DESIGN PROFESSIONAL, variations from compressive strengths and

Prepare Report for Each Concrete Mix.

7) Percentage of deleterious materials.

Trial Batches of Concrete.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

Testing and Inspection Services.

Concrete protection of reinforcing steel.

Bonding Concrete to Existing Concrete

Temperature of materials when mixed.

Temperature of concrete as placed.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.04 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

Concrete failing to meet this Specification:

Protect foundations, floors, and related surfaces during construction.

Patched work is unacceptable.

Liquid-applied self-leveling floor underlayment.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Conform to applicable code for combustibility or flame spread requirements.

Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

During curing process, ventilate spaces to remove excess moisture.

Water: Potable and not detrimental to underlayment mix materials.

Primer: Manufacturer's recommended type.

Joint and Crack Filler: Latex based filler, as recommended by manufacturer.

Site mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Mix to self-leveling consistency without over-watering.

Vacuum clean surfaces.

Prime substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow to dry.

Close floor openings.

Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Place material onto substrate. Do not retemper or add water.

Place and screed while the material is still highly flowable.

Be careful not to create cold joints.

Place before partition installation.

Slope floors with smooth transitions to floor drains.

Underlayment (CUL-B), Trowelable, For General Use.

Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL